Professional/Basic

Ver. 3.4

En Instruction Manual
Formal designations of application software used in this manual
(Designation in this manual) (Formal designation)
Windows, Windows 10 Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro Operating System

Windows, Windows 11 Microsoft® Windows® 11 Pro Operating System

Trademarks
• “Microsoft”, “Windows”, “Windows 10” and “Windows 11” are registered trade-marks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
• “Intel” and “Pentium” are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S.A. and other
countries.
Other company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the registered trademarks
or trademarks of their respective companies.

Notes on this manual

• No part of this manual may be reprinted or reproduced in any form or by any means without the
permission of Konica Minolta, Inc.
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
• Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However,
should you have any questions or comments, or find an error or missing section, please contact
your local sales office.
• Konica Minolta accepts no responsibility for consequences resulting from failure to follow the
instructions outlined in this manual, the condition above notwithstanding.

About this manual

• Some of the screen capture shots in this manual may be from previous versions.
Introduction
The SpectraMagic NX software is color data software designed to connect spectrophotometers such as
the CM-3600A or chroma meters to a PC (personal computer) to enable the measurement and graphic
display of sample data, as well as various other operations.
The SpectraMagic NX is available as two types: The Professional Edition, which features a variety of
functions, and the Basic Edition, which features only basic functions.

Safety Precautions
Before you use the SpectraMagic NX software, we recommend that you thoroughly read this
manual as well as the instruction manuals of your PC and the spectrophotometer.

Package Contents
• Installation DVD-ROM of SpectraMagic NX (Qty: 1)
• USB protection key
• Installation Guide
• Authorized Service Facility
The Instruction Manual is installed in PDF form with a shortcut in the start menu during the software
installation.
To read the manual, go to Start Menu → All programs → KONICAMINOLTA → SpectraMagic NX →
SpectraMagic NX Manual.
Versions of the Instruction Manual in other languages are also included on the installation DVD-ROM.
If you want to view the instruction manual while using the software, select Help - Instruction Manual from
the menu bar.

Software License Agreement

The terms of the license agreement of the SpectraMagic NX software are provided in the Software
License Agreement dialog box displayed on-screen during the installation process. This software can be
installed only if you agree to all the terms of the agreement.

1
Notes on Use
• The SpectraMagic NX application software is designed to be used with the Windows 10 or
Windows 11 operating system. Note that neither operating system is included with this soft-ware.
• One of these operating systems must be installed on the PC before this software can be installed.
• When inserting the DVD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive, note the correct orientation of the disc.
Insert it gently.
• Keep the DVD-ROM clean and free from scratches. If the recorded surface becomes dirty or the
label surface is scratched, a read error may result.
• Avoid exposing the DVD-ROM to rapid temperature changes and condensation.
• Avoid leaving it in locations where it may be exposed to high temperatures from direct sunlight or
heaters.
• Do not drop the DVD-ROM or subject it to strong impact.
• Keep the DVD-ROM away from water, alcohol, paint thinners, and other such substances.
• Remove the DVD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive while the computer is turned on.

Notes on Storage
• After using the DVD-ROM, return it to its case and store in a safe place.
• Avoid leaving the DVD-ROM in locations where it may be exposed to high temperatures from
direct sunlight or heaters.
• The DVD-ROM should not be kept in areas of high humidity.
Every effort has been made to ensure the accurate operation of this software. However, should you have
any questions or comments, please contact the nearest KONICA MINOLTA authorized service facility.

2
3
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW ................................................... 5
1.1 System Requirements ................................................................... 6
1.2 Major Functions ............................................................................. 7
1.3 Operation Flow .............................................................................. 9
1.4 Window Configuration ................................................................ 10

CHAPTER 2 OPERATION GUIDE ..................................... 25

2.1 Starting the SpectraMagic NX software .................................... 27
2.2 Calibration .................................................................................... 35
2.3 Preparing for Measurement ....................................................... 37
2.4 Specifying Target Data/Tolerance .............................................. 68
2.5 Measurement ............................................................................... 93
2.6 List Window Operation ............................................................. 108
2.7 Canvas Window Operation ....................................................... 120
2.8 Printing ....................................................................................... 127
2.9 Saving Data ................................................................................ 132
2.10 Other Functions ......................................................................... 133

CHAPTER 3 GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES .................. 213

3.1 Spectral Graph Object .............................................................. 215
3.2 Absolute Graph (L*a*b, Hunter Lab) Object .......................... 224
3.3 Color Difference Graph (ΔL*Δa*Δb*, ΔL Δa Δb) Object ....... 232
3.4 xy Chromaticity Diagram ......................................................... 240
3.5 3D Graph (ΔL*Δa*Δb*) ............................................................. 248
3.6 Two-axis Graph ........................................................................ 257
3.7 Data List Object ......................................................................... 264
3.8 Trend Chart/Histogram Object ................................................ 265
3.9 Image Object ............................................................................. 275
3.10 Numeric Label Object ............................................................... 278
3.11 String Label Object ................................................................... 282
3.12 Pseudo Color Object ................................................................. 283
3.13 Line Graph Object ..................................................................... 286
3.14 Statistic Object .......................................................................... 294
3.15 Line Object ................................................................................ 297
3.16 Rectangle Object ....................................................................... 298
3.17 Operation of the Canvas Window in Edit Mode ..................... 299

4
CHAPTER 1
OVERVIEW

Requirements
System
1.1 System Requirements.................................................................................. 6
1.1.1 System Requirements ....................................................................................6
1.1.2 Compatible Instruments.................................................................................6
1.1.3 Language .........................................................................................................6

Functions
Major
1.2 Major Functions............................................................................................ 7
1.3 Operation Flow ............................................................................................. 9
1.4 Window Configuration............................................................................... 10
1.4.1 Operation Window........................................................................................ 10

Operation
Flow
1.4.2 Menu Bar ....................................................................................................... 11
1.4.3 Standard Toolbar ..........................................................................................13
1.4.4 Shortcut Keys ................................................................................................16
1.4.5 List Window...................................................................................................17

Configuration
1.4.6 Canvas Window ............................................................................................17

Window
1.4.7 Tool Icon Bar..................................................................................................18
1.4.8 Sensor Sync Window ................................................................................... 19
1.4.9 Template Window .........................................................................................20
1.4.10 Status Window..............................................................................................21
1.4.11 Status Bar ......................................................................................................22
1.4.12 Navigation Window ......................................................................................23

5
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW

1.1 System Requirements

Requirements
System

1.1.1 System Requirements

OS Windows 10 Pro 32-bit
Windows 10 Pro 64-bit
Windows 11 Pro
(English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, Simplified
Chinese, Traditional Chinese and Hangul versions)
• The hardware of the computer system to be used must meet or exceed the
greater of the recommended system requirements for the compatible OS
being used or the following specifications.

Computer PC equipped with a processor equivalent to Pentium III 600MHz or better

Memory 128 MB (256 MB recommended)

Hard disk drive 450 MB of available hard disk space

At least 400 MB of available disk space is required on the system drive (drive
where the OS is installed).

Display Display hardware capable of displaying 1024 x 768 pixels / 16-bit color or
better

Optical disc drive DVD-ROM drive

USB port Required for protection key

USB or serial port Required for instrument

Browser Internet Explorer Ver. 5.01 or later

1.1.2 Compatible Instruments

CM-3700A, CM-3700A-U, CM-36dG/36dGV/36d, CM-3600A, CM-3610A, CM-3630,
CM-2600d/2500d, CM-2500c, CM-25cG, CM-26dG/26d/25d, CM-700d/600d, CM-512m3A,
CM-5/CR-5, CR-400/410, DP-400, FD-7/FD-5

1.1.3 Language
Display language English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, Japanese, Chinese
(Simplified and Traditional)
(Select one during installation.)

6
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW

1.2 Major Functions

Items marked with Ê are supported only by SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition.

Color space L*a*b*, L*C*h, Lab99, LCh99, XYZÊ, Hunter Lab, YxyÊ, L*u’v’Ê, L*u*v*Ê
and their color differences; Munsell C. Munsell D65

Index MI, WI (CIE1982, ASTM E313-73, ASTM E313-98, HUNTER, BERGERÊ,

Functions
TAUBEÊ, STENSBYÊ, GanzÊ), Tint (CIE1982Ê, ASTM E313-98Ê, GanzÊ), YI

Major
(ASTM D1925-70, ASTM E313-73, ASTM E313-98Ê, DIN6167Ê), WB (ASTM
E313-73), Standard Depth (ISO 105.A06Ê), Brightness (TAPPI T452Ê, ISO2470Ê),
Opacity (ISO 2471, TAPPI T425 89% White Plate), Haze (ASTM D1003-97Ê), Density
(Status AÊ, Status TÊ), Dominant WavelengthÊ, Excitation PurityÊ, RXRYRZÊ, GU
(CM-36dG/ CM-36dGV, CM-25cG or CM-26dG only), Gardner, Hazen (APHA) colour
scale, Iodine color number, European Pharmacopoeia, US Pharmacopeia, 8 degree gloss
value (CM-36dG/CM-36dGV/CM-36d, CM-3600A, CM-3610A, CM-26dG/CM-26d/
CM-25d, CM-2600d/2500d, CM-700d/ 600d only), user equation, each difference,
555Ê
Note on Haze (ASTM D1003-97):
With some instrument types, the illumination/observation system may not satisfy the
definition of haze (ASTM D1003-97). However, this presents no problem as long as the
value is used as a relative value.

Color ΔE*ab (CIE 1976), ΔE*94 (CIE 1994) and each component of lightness, saturation
difference and hue, ΔE00 (CIE 2000) and each component of lightness, saturation and hue, ΔE99
equation (DIN99), ΔE (Hunter), CMC (I:c) and each component of lightness, saturation and
hue, FMC-2Ê, NBS 100Ê, NBS 200Ê, ΔEc (degree) (DIN 6175-2), ΔEp (degree)
(DIN 6175-2)
Index StrengthÊ, Pseudo StrengthÊ, Staining degree (ISO 105.A04E)Ê, Staining degree
Difference rating (ISO 105.A04E)Ê, Grey scale (ISO 105.A05), Grey Scale Rating (ISO
105.A05), K/S strength (Apparent (ΔE*ab, ΔL*, ΔC*, ΔH*, Δa*, Δb*) maximum
absorption, total wavelength, user wavelength), NC#Ê, NC# GradeÊ, NsÊ, Ns
GradeÊ

Notes concerning displayed values:

The SpectraMagic NX software enhances calculation accuracy by performing
internal calculations with numbers greater in magnitude than those actually
displayed. Consequently, the least significant digit displayed may differ from that of
the instrument by one digit due to rounding or color space conversion.
Because the tolerance judgement calculation and graph-plotted points are also
processed with numbers greater in magnitude than those actually displayed, the
judgement result or plotted points may differ from those obtained with the values
displayed on the instrument.

Each colorimetric value of the data measured with a spectrophotometer or obtained

by manual input of spectral reflectance data is calculated from spectral reflectance.
Each colorimetric value of the data measured with a colorimeter or obtained by
manual input of colorimetric data is calculated from XYZ data. As a result, the
colorimetric value of the average value obtained by the manual averaging
measurement or by the averaging of list data may differ from the average of
colorimetric values displayed in the list.
Observer 2 degree , 10 degree

7
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW

Illuminants A, C, D50, D55, D65, D75, F2, F6, F7, F8, F10, F11, F12, U50, ID50, ID65, User illuminant
1 to 3
Up to three illuminants can be displayed simultaneously.
Graph Spectral reflectance/(transmittance) and its difference, L*a*b* absolute value,
ΔL*a*b* (color difference distribution, MI, 3D), Hunter Lab absolute value, Hunter
ΔLab (color difference distribution), Trend chart and histogram of each color space
and color difference equation, Pseudo Color display
Functions

Image display Can be linked to sample data and images (JPEG or BMP).
Major

Instrument Measurement/calibration
control Automatic averaging measurement: 2 to 999 measurements
functions Manual averaging measurement: Optional (user-determined) number of times (The
standard deviation and average for the color space selected for measurement are
displayed.)
Remote measurement (Excluding CM-3000 Series)
Downloading of configuration data to the instrument (Excluding CM-3000 Series,
CM-36dG Series)
Uploading of data stored in instrument memory (Excluding CM-3000 Series,
CM-36dG Series)
Job function settings on instrument (CM-26dG/CM-26d/CM-25d, CM-25cG
(firmware ver. 1.2 or later) only)
Sample Viewer function (CM-36d Series only)
Target data Two or more pieces of target data can be registered (automatic selection).
Colorimetric data can be registered manually by specifying the color space.
Target data can be downloaded to the instrument. (Excluding CM-3000 Series,
CM-36dG Series)
Data list Listing of target data and sample data
Editing (delete, sort, average, copy & paste, search, file merge)
Link between JPEG images, Display of statistic value and pass/fail ratio, Visual
judgment result input function, Additional data information inputting/listing function
External I/O Uploading/saving of data file(s) in original formats (with “mes” file extension).
Uploading/saving of template file(s) in original format (with “mtp” file extension).
Uploading/saving of data in text format.
Saving of data in XML format.
Copying of lists in clipboard.
Help Navigable display, “Precise Color Communication” Tutorial, Manual

8
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW

1.3 Operation Flow

Start the SpectraMagic NX software. (pp. 27 & 28)

Connect the spectrophotometer to a PC. (pp. 29-31)

Calibration (p. 35)

Zero calibration

White calibration

Operation
To conduct To conduct color difference measurement

Flow
absolute value
Specify target data
measurement
(pp. 68-82).
(p. 85)
Measure target data.

Input data manually.

Upload data from the instrument.

Select target data from list items.

Set tolerance Data exchange with the instrument

(pp. 87-89)
Measurement Download target data. (p. 178)
(pp. 93-100)
Upload sample data. (p. 102-104)
Pass/fail judgement
(p. 91-92)

Data management (pp. 108-132)

Display Print Save

Disconnect the spectrophotometer (p. 29)

Exit the SpectraMagic NX software.

The shaded sections indicate functions available only when the spectrophotometer is connected and the
protection key is attached to the computer.

9
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW

1.4 Window Configuration

1.4.1 Operation Window
The SpectraMagic NX software includes the following windows and bars.

Menu bar (p. 11) Standard toolbar (p. 13) List window (p. 17)
Shows functions Displays icons corresponding Displays sample data.
categorized to frequently used functions.
among menus.
Configuration
Window

Status window Tool icon bar (p. 18) Status bar (p. 22) Canvas window
(p. 21) Displays icons representing Displays the details (p. 17)
Displays the graphic objects. You can or status of each Graphic objects
detailed status of select graphic objects from function of the are pasted in this
the instrument. this bar and place them in SpectraMagic NX. window.
the canvas window.

10
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW

1.4.2 Menu Bar

When the SpectraMagic NX software is started, a menu bar appears at the top of the window in a man-
ner similar to other Windows-based software. This section lists the functions available in the menu bar
and the manual pages on which these functions are described.
File View
New ...............................144 Standard Toolbar ...........................10, 13
Open Ctrl+O Status Bar .......................... 10, 22
Close List Window ...................10, 17, 108
Status Window .......................... 10, 21
Save Ctrl+S
Template Window................................ 20
Save As ...............................132 Navigation ................................ 23
Save Selection As Text ....................... 114
Sensor Sync Window .......................... 19
Save List Items As XML..................... 114
Template Zoom In List ...............................119
Load Template..............................134 Zoom Out List ...............................119
Save as Template .........................133 Restore List Size ...............................119
Page Setup ...............................127 Welcome to SpectraMagic NX ............ 28
Printer Setup Toolbar setup ......................... 13,126

Configuration
Edit Shortcuts ................................ 16

Window
Print Preview ...............................129
Print Ctrl+P ....................129 Instrument
Serial Printer ...............................130 Connect/Disconnect F5/Shift+F5 ...... 29
Serial PrintOut ...............................130 Communication Setup ...................... 34
Serial Printer Setting .....................131
Instrument Settings ...................... 34
Startup Options ...............................135
Calibration F2.................. 35
Send Mail ...............................159
Measure Target F3.................. 69
Property .................................57
Measure Sample F4.................. 93
File Locking Ê ...............................137 Measurement Options ...................... 63
Documents recently opened with UV Adjustment Ê ...................... 39
the SpectraMagic NX software. ..........12 Averaged Measurement ...................... 99
(Up to five files are displayed.)
Target Averaged Measurement .. 73
Exit Shift+X Sample Averaged Measurement 99
Remote Measurement ...................... 70
Edit
Target Remote Measurement F6 .. 70
Cut Ctrl+X .... 113, 123, 299 Sample Remote Measurement F7. 95
Copy Ctrl+C .... 113, 123, 299 Remote Measurement Option ......... 196
Paste Ctrl+V .... 113, 123, 299 Upload/Download
Delete Del ......................... 114 Upload Samples .................... 102
Upload Target ...................... 80
Search Ctrl+F..................... 117
Merge Ctrl+G ....................150 Download Target .................... 178
Bring Forward ...............................299 Clear Stored Data
Send Backward ...............................299
Set Calibration Data........................... 160
Bring to Front ...............................299
Standalone Configuration .................. 163
Send to Back ...............................299
Standalone Configuration ............. 163
The commands under the Instrument menu are available
only when the spectrophotometer or the chroma meter is User Index ...............................176
connected and the protection key is attached to the com-
puter. Initialize Instrument
Job Settings .............................. 200
Instrument - Standalone Configuration - User Index menu Sample Viewer ........................... 67
is displayed only when the CR-400/410 is connected.

11
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW

Data Tool
Tolerance Setting .................................88 Macro .............................. 192
Judgement Format..........................59,91 Edit .............................. 192
Default Tolerance Setting .....................87 Start .............................. 195
Supplementary data information Ê .....65 End
MRU
Auto Target .................................82
Input Spectral Target ............................76 Change Target ...............................115
Input Colorimetric Target......................78 Move to Target
Average ...............................116
Observer and Illuminant.......................37 Sort ...............................114
List Items .................................46 Working Target ................................ 85
Decimal Places .................................62 View Settings .......... 110,111,120,152
Next Data ...............................126 Security Setting Ê............................. 138
Previous Data ...............................126
Edit Mode .............................. 120
Data Property ...............................104 Option .............................. 156

Object Window
Align ...............................123 Cascade .............................. 150
Configuration

Align ...............................123 Tile .............................. 150

Window

Size
Documents currently open
Select ...............................121
Line ...............................297 Help
Rectangle ...............................298 Navigation ........................ 23, 151
Delta L*a*b* ...............................232
Delta HunterLab ...............................224 Next .............................. 151
Spectral Graph ...............................215 Previous .............................. 151
L*a*b* ...............................224 Manual .............................. 152
Hunter Lab ...............................224 About SpectraMagic NX ...................... 27
Trend/Histgram ...............................265
Image ...............................275 Items marked with Ê are supported only by
Data Label ...............................278 SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition.
String Label ...............................282
Pseudo Color ...............................283
Line Graph ...............................286 In the standard tool-
Statistic ...............................294 bar, this icon repre-
Xy chromaticity diagram.....................240 sents the
L*a*b*3D ...............................248 command. See
page 13 for details.
Two-axis graph ...............................257
Data List ...............................264
Property Shortcut keys for
this command. See
page 16 for details.

Documents recently
opened with the
SpectraMagic NX
software. (Up to five
files are displayed.)

12
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW

1.4.3 Standard Toolbar

The standard toolbar contains buttons corresponding to frequently used functions. To invoke the com-
mand, simply click the button with the mouse.

• Place the mouse pointer over a button to display a brief description of its function.
• The buttons can be displayed in two different sizes and can be arranged in any order desired.

Showing/hiding the standard toolbar

Click View - Standard Toolbar in the menu bar to show/hide the standard toolbar.

Configuration
Window
Customizing the standard toolbar
To customize your toolbar with a desired combination of icons, select View - Toolbar setup from the
menu bar.
1. Click the New button.
2. Type the name of a toolbar and click the OK button.

13
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW

3. Select the Command tab and select the category of icon you want to add to the new toolbar from the
list displayed below Categories.
The button icons for the selected category are displayed in the Buttons area.

4. Drag-and-drop the button icon to the new toolbar.

Configuration
Window

The button appears in the toolbar.

14
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW

■ Settings in the Customize dialog box

Toolbars tab
SpectraMagic NX
This is the standard toolbar. When this item is checked, the standard toolbar appears. Uncheck this
item to hide the toolbar.

Configuration
To return to the initial setting, click the Reset button.

Window
Align
This is the graphic object alignment bar. When this item is checked, the graphic object alignment bar
appears. Uncheck this item to hide the bar.
To return to the initial setting, click the Reset button.

Show Tooltips
Position the mouse pointer over a button to see brief explanation of the function of the icon dis-
played as a tooltip.
Check this option to have a tooltip appear. Uncheck this item if you do not want a tooltip to appear.

Cool Look
The appearance of the icons shown on the toolbar can be changed.
When this option is checked, the icons normally appear flat but change to a three-dimensional but-
ton appearance when the mouse pointer is positioned over them.

Cool look display Button display

Large Buttons
The default size of the icons in the toolbar can be increased to a larger size with a text description of
each button displayed below the icon.

Command tab
Select this tab to add or remove the buttons appearing in the toolbar.

15
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW

1.4.4 Shortcut Keys

You can also access the menu commands of the SpectraMagic NX software simply by pressing various
shortcut keys.

Editing shortcut keys

You can customize the shortcut keys by selecting View - Edit Shortcuts from the menu bar.
Configuration
Window

1. To create a shortcut or edit an existing shortcut key, select the desired process under “Select a
macro.”
2. Click the Create Shortcut button.
3. The Assign Shortcut dialog box opens. Press the key(s) you want to assign to the shortcut.
In the box below “Press new shortcut key:”, “Ctrl” and the key(s) you pressed are displayed. If you
pressed any key while holding down the Shift or Alt key, or if you pressed a function key, the key(s)
you pressed will be displayed.
If the key(s) you pressed have already been assigned to another macro, the corresponding macro is
displayed below “Current Assignment.” If the key is not assigned to any macro, “(Unassigned)” is
displayed.

Example:
When the Ctrl and M
keys are pressed

4. Click the OK button.

16
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW

■ Shortcut Keys dialog box

Create Shortcut
Press this button to create a new shortcut.
Reset All
Press this button to reset all shortcuts that have been created. The SpectraMagic NX software returns
to the initial settings as shown on pages 11 and 12.
Remove
Select a macro whose shortcut you want to delete. Select its shortcut and click this button to delete
it.

1.4.5 List Window

The list window lists the sample data.
Each document file has its own list window. When the canvas window is closed, the list window also
closes.

Configuration
Window
1.4.6 Canvas Window
The canvas window is the window in which graphic objects are pasted.
Two views of the canvas window are available for each document file: Display View and Printing View.
In edit mode, graphic objects can be placed differently in each window as desired.

Area where graphic

Margin line Print area objects are pasted

View selection tabs

Ê Used to switch the canvas window between the display and printing views.
Right-clicking the tab opens the pop-up menu, which you can use to add a
new view.
(Ê Supported only by SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition)

17
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW

1.4.7 Tool Icon Bar

You can select graphic objects from this bar and place them in the canvas window.
This bar appears in the window when the SpectraMagic NX software is in edit mode.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

1) Selection tool
2) Line object
3) Rectangle object
4) Data list object
5) Color difference graph (ΔL*a*b) object
6) Color difference graph (ΔHunter Lab) object
Configuration
Window

7) Spectral graph object

8) Absolute graph (L*a*b) object
9) Absolute graph (Hunter Lab) object
10) Trend chart/histogram object
11) Image object
12) Numeric label object
13) String label object
14) Pseudo color object
15) Line graph object
16) Statistic object
17) xy chromaticity object
18) 3D (ΔL*a*b*) graph object
19) Two-axis graph object
For details of the graphic objects, see “Graphic Object Properties” on page 213.

18
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW

1.4.8 Sensor Sync Window

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer (excluding the CM-3000 Series,
CM-36dG Series, CM-26dG Series, or the chroma meter) is connected and the protection key is
attached to the computer.
This window shows the data structure (the relationship between target data and sample data) in the
instrument connected to SpectraMagic NX software.
Since the data is displayed in a tree structure, it is easy to select only necessary data and upload it in the
document file or download it to the instrument.
For details of the sensor sync function, refer to page 185.

Data structure in the instrument Items displayed in the view

Configuration
Window
■ Showing/hiding the sensor sync window
The sensor sync window is not displayed when SpectraMagic NX software is started for the first time.
Select View - Sensor Sync Window from the menu bar to show or hide the sensor sync window.

19
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW

1.4.9 Template Window

This window displays icons for template files. By selecting the icon from this window, you can change
templates easily. For details of template files, refer to page 133.

Showing/hiding the Template Window

Configuration
Window

The Template Window is not displayed when SpectraMagic NX software is started for the first time.
Select View - Template Window from the menu bar and select to show or hide the Template Window.

20
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW

1.4.10 Status Window

The status window displays the operating status and communication status of the spectrophotometer.

Configuration
Window
Examples of displayed comments are as follows:
Instrument Status
Measurement available/ [Not connected/ Zero Calibration is required./ White Calibration
is required.
aMeasuring/ aCalibrating/ aConfiguring/ aUploading/ aDownloading
LLow Battery/ LFlash Error
Measurement Options
Remote Measurement
Auto Averaging
Beep
Last Calibration
(Time display)
Communication
RS-232C (with specified parameters such as COM and bps)
Communication Status
OK/ aCommunicating/ Not connected/ Error
Instrument Settings
Instrument Name
Instrument status 1
Instrument status 2
Instrument status 3

21
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW

■ Showing/hiding the status window

You can show or hide the status window by selecting View - Status Window from the menu bar.
Configuration
Window

1.4.11 Status Bar

Displays the details or status of each function of the SpectraMagic NX.

When the security set-

tings have been defined, An icon appears showing
the name of the login Displays the the status of the instrument. Displays the name
user is displayed. (*Only number of Connected of the connected
with the SpectraMagic banks of instrument.
NX Professional Version) the data file Disconnected

When the mouse pointer Indicates whether the current mode is Displays the
is placed over a menu, a demo mode or instrument mode. product type of
button, or a tool icon, the In demo mode, the SpectraMagic NX SpectraMagic NX
description of the item's software can be operated as if the
function is displayed. instrument were connected even when
the instrument is not actually con-
nected. When you attempt to take a
measurement, a random measurement
result is displayed.

22
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW

1.4.12 Navigation Window

The Navigation window displays the operation guide for the SpectraMagic NX software.

Configuration
Showing/hiding the Navigation window Window

You can show or hide the Navigation window by selecting View - Navigation from the menu bar.

23
 CHAPTER 1 : OVERVIEW
Configurati
Window

24
CHAPTER 2
OPERATION GUIDE

SpectraMagic
NX software

Starting the
Items marked with Ê are supported only by SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition.
2.1 Starting the SpectraMagic NX software .................................................. 27
2.1.1 Starting the SpectraMagic NX Software for the First Time ..................28

Calibration
2.1.2 Establishing Connection with the Spectrophotometer or the Chroma Meter ....29
2.1.3 Setting Up the Instrument........................................................................34
2.2 Calibration................................................................................................... 35

Measurement
Preparing for
2.2.1 Calibrating the Instrument .......................................................................35
2.3 Preparing for Measurement....................................................................... 37
2.3.1 Setting the Observer and Illuminant .......................................................37
2.3.2 UV Adjustment Ê .....................................................................................39

Target Data/
Specifying
2.3.3 Setting the List Items................................................................................46

Tolerance
2.3.4 Bank Setting ..............................................................................................57
2.3.5 Setting the Assessment Format shown in the List ................................59
2.3.6 Setting the Number of Decimal Places for List Items ............................62
2.3.7 Setting the Measurement Options ..........................................................63

Measurement
2.3.8 Setting Auto-naming ................................................................................64
2.3.9 Specifying supplementary information of data Ê.................................65
2.3.10 Sample Viewer ............................................................................................67
2.4 Specifying Target Data/Tolerance ............................................................. 68

List Window
Operation
2.4.1 Registering Target Data............................................................................68
2.4.1-a Performing Target Measurement ............................................................69
2.4.1-b Performing Target Remote Measurement..............................................70
2.4.1-c Performing Target Interval Measurement Ê..........................................71

Operation
2.4.1-d Performing Target Automatic Averaging Measurement.......................72

Window
Canvas
2.4.1-e Performing Manual Averaging Measurement........................................73
2.4.1-f Registering Target by Manual Data Input...............................................76
2.4.1-g Uploading Target Data from the Instrument ..........................................80
2.4.1-h Copying Target from the Existing Data...................................................82

Printing
2.4.2 Specifying the Target Data.......................................................................82
2.4.2-a Selecting Specific Target Data.................................................................82
2.4.2-b Auto Target................................................................................................82
2.4.2-c CCS Ê ........................................................................................................83
2.4.2-d Not Specify Target (Absolute measurement).........................................85 Saving
2.4.2-e Specifying Working Target Ê..................................................................85
Data

2.4.3 Setting the Tolerance ...............................................................................87

2.4.3-a Setting the Initial Tolerance .....................................................................87
2.4.3-b Setting the Tolerance for Each Target ....................................................88
Functions

2.4.3-c Specifying the Judgement Format in the List Window .........................91

Other

2.5 Measurement.............................................................................................. 93
2.5.1 Performing Sample Measurement ..........................................................94
2.5.2 Performing Sample Remote Measurement............................................95
2.5.3 Performing Interval Measurement Ê......................................................96
2.5.4 Performing Sample Automatic Averaging Measurement.....................98
2.5.5 Performing Sample Manual Averaging Measurement..........................99
2.5.6 Uploading the Sample Data from the Instrument................................102
2.5.7 Displaying Data Properties.....................................................................104
2.5.8 Using the Visual Judgement of Data Ê................................................106
2.5.9 Linking an Image to Data .......................................................................107

25
 2.6 List Window Operation............................................................................ 108
2.6.1 Tree ..........................................................................................................108
SpectraMagic

2.6.2 List............................................................................................................109
NX software
Starting the

2.6.3 Editing the List Data................................................................................113

2.6.4 Changing the Linkage with Target Data................................................115
2.6.5 Adding Averaged Data ...........................................................................116
2.6.6 Searching for data ..................................................................................117
Calibration

2.6.7 Enlarging/Reducing the List Size ...........................................................119

2.7 Canvas Window Operation...................................................................... 120
2.7.1 Editing the Canvas Window...................................................................120
2.7.2 Pasting a Graphic Object........................................................................121
Measurement
Preparing for

2.7.3 Editing the Graphic Object .....................................................................121

2.7.4 Adding a New View/Deleting a View Ê ................................................123
2.7.5 Run Mode of the Canvas Window.........................................................125
2.7.6 Window Operation when the List Window is Hidden..........................126
2.8 Printing ...................................................................................................... 127
Target Data/
Specifying

Tolerance

2.8.1 Page Setup ..............................................................................................127

2.8.2 Print Preview ...........................................................................................129
2.8.3 Start Printing ...........................................................................................129
2.8.4 Serial Printing..........................................................................................130
Measurement

2.9 Saving Data............................................................................................... 132

2.9.1 Saving a Data File ...................................................................................132
2.10 Other Functions ........................................................................................ 133
List Window

2.10.1 Template File...........................................................................................133

Operation

2.10.2 Reading a Template File.........................................................................134

2.10.3 Setting Startup Options..........................................................................135
2.10.4 Locking Files Ê .......................................................................................137
2.10.5 Security Functions Ê..............................................................................138
Operation

2.10.5-a Enabling the Security Functions ............................................................138

Window
Canvas

2.10.5-b Managing the User Database ................................................................139

2.10.5-c Setting the Operation Limit for Each User Group ................................140
2.10.5-d Showing the Audit Trail..........................................................................141
2.10.5-e Setting the Security Functions...............................................................142
Printing

2.10.6 Creating a New Data File........................................................................144

2.10.7 Opening a Data File ................................................................................145
2.10.8 Arranging Windows with/without Overlapping ...................................150
2.10.9 Merging Multiple Data Files...................................................................150
2.10.10 Starting Navigation.................................................................................151
Saving
Data

2.10.11 Viewing the Instruction Manual.............................................................151

2.10.12 View Settings of Each Window..............................................................152
2.10.13 Color Setting ...........................................................................................155
2.10.14 Setting Options .......................................................................................156
Functions

2.10.15 Sending Data Files by E-mail .................................................................159

Other

2.10.16 Downloading Calibration Data to the Instrument ................................160

2.10.17 Downloading Configuration Data to the Instrument ...........................163
2.10.18 Specifying a User Calibration Value to the Instrument Ê...................171
2.10.19 Downloading User Index to the Instrument .........................................176
2.10.20 Downloading the Target Data to the Instrument .................................178
2.10.21 Annual Service Recalibration Recommendation Message .................184
2.10.22 Sensor Sync Function.............................................................................185
2.10.23 Macro Operation Ê ................................................................................192
2.10.24 Setting the Display of the Instrument Screen for Remote Measurement ......196

26
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.1 Starting the SpectraMagic NX

software

SpectraMagic
NX software

Starting the
For information on installing the SpectraMagic NX software, refer to the Installation Guide.
Many functions of SpectraMagic NX require a protection key before they are available for use. Refer to
page 7 for an overview of the functions that can be used only when the protection key is attached. The
protection key is also necessary to start the SpectraMagic NX software for the first time.
Select the SpectraMagic NX icon registered with the Start menu. You can also start the software by
selecting the data file. When the SpectraMagic NX software starts, the following splash screen appears.

■ Splash screen

■ Version information
You can also display the splash screen by selecting Help - About SpectraMagic NX from the menu bar.
The current version of the SpectraMagic NX software is shown at the upper left corner of the screen.

27
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.1.1 Starting the SpectraMagic NX Software for the First Time

The first time the SpectraMagic NX software starts, the “Welcome to SpectraMagic NX” dialog box
SpectraMagic
NX software
Starting the

appears.

■ Welcome to SpectraMagic NX dialog box

Navigation
Open Navigation
Click this button to close the dialog box and show the Navigation window.
Display Style
Simple, Standard, Detailed
Click one of the radio buttons to display a preview of the corresponding view on the right. Click the
OK button to close the dialog box and display the operation window in the selected view.
Don't show this dialog at startup
Leave this box unchecked to view the Welcome to SpectraMagic NX dialog box the next time you
start the SpectraMagic NX software. You can view this dialog box at any time by selecting View -
Welcome to SpectraMagic NX from the menu bar.

28
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.1.2 Establishing Connection with the Spectrophotometer

or the Chroma Meter

SpectraMagic
NX software

Starting the
This procedure is available only when a spectrophotometer or chroma meter is connected and the
protection key is attached to the computer.

Connecting to the spectrophotometer or the chroma meter

When the SpectraMagic NX software is started for the first time, a connection is made automatically to
the instrument, and the type of the instrument is detected automatically. To establish a connection
manually, follow the procedure below:
• When connecting to an instrument via USB, you need to complete the communication setting
before connecting the instrument. For the procedure of the communication setting, refer to page
31.
• When connecting to an instrument using Bluetooth® communication, you need to establish the
connection between the instrument and computer with the driver software supplied with the
Bluetooth® adapter before you can connect to the instrument. For the procedure, refer to the
instruction manuals of the instrument and Bluetooth® adapter.
• Up to four CM-700d/600d units can be connected by using either USB connection or Bluetooth®
communication. If you want to connect several units of the CM-700d/600d, complete the con-
nection for the first unit as described below, and then configure the communication setting for
the following units as described on page 32.
1. Select Instrument - Connect from the menu bar or click the icon in the toolbar.
The SpectraMagic NX software connects to the instrument and the status of the instrument is dis-
played in the status window. Once the connection is established, Disconnect appears in the Instru-
ment menu instead of Connect.

■ If the connection fails

If the connection cannot be established, a dialog box appears displaying the messages “No response
from instrument” followed by “Connection failed. Retry after changing communication setup.” The
Serial Port Settings dialog box then appears. Specify the communication parameters in the Serial Port
Settings dialog box and click the OK button. The system will attempt to reestablish connection. If the
connection fails again, check the following:
• The instrument is turned on;
• (If the instrument is connected via cable) The instrument and PC are securely connected with a
cable;
• (If the instrument is connected via Bluetooth) The Bluetooth® adapter is securely attached and
the Bluetooth® adapter’s driver software is active; and
• The instrument is set to remote communication mode.

29
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

• Also, if the instrument allows the selection of communication settings, check that the communi-
cation settings specified in the Serial Port Settings dialog box are the same as the communication
settings specified with the instrument.
SpectraMagic
NX software
Starting the

After checking all of these, select Connect again.

For details, see “Instrument preparations” in the Navigation Window and the instruction manual of the
instrument.

■ Problems while connected

Connection problems may occur even after the SpectraMagic NX software has successfully connected
to the instrument and established proper communication. In that case, a dialog box opens and displays
“No response from instrument.” Click OK and check the following:
• The cable is securely connected (when connected via cable); and
• The Bluetooth® adapter is securely attached and the Bluetooth® adapter’s driver software is
active (when connected via Bluetooth®).
After checking them, cycle the power of the instrument (turn the power OFF, then back ON), and select
Connect again.
If the instrument is connected via Bluetooth® communication and communication is interrupted due to
surrounding radio wave conditions, SpectraMagic NX attempts to recover the connection.
Consequently, when the radio wave conditions improve, the connection is automatically established
again.

■ If the connected instrument does not have calibration data

After the instrument is successfully connected for communication, if the instrument does not have
calibration data, the Calibration Data dialog box appears. See “Downloading Calibration Data to the
Instrument” on page 160 to specify the calibration data.

■ If you previously exited SpectraMagic NX when the instrument was ready to

perform remote measurement
The next time the instrument is successfully connected for communication, it will also be ready to
perform remote measurement. If calibration has not been performed, the Zero Calibration and White
Calibration dialog boxes appear. Follow the on-screen instructions and perform calibration. If
calibration is cancelled, remote measurement is turned off. For details on remote measurement, see
pages 93 and 95.

■ If a CM-25cG or CM-26dG/CM-26d/CM-25d is connected

SpectraMagic NX does not support the “Gloss only” measurement mode of the CM-25cG or CM-26dG,
or the “Opacity” mode of the CM-26dG/CM-26d/CM-25d. If the instrument itself is set to “Gloss only”
or “Opacity”, the setting will be changed to “Color & Gloss” when SpectraMagic NX connects to the
instrument.

■ If a CM-3630 is connected
When the SpectraMagic NX is started with the CM-3630 for the first time, you need to establish the
connection and then set up the CM-3630 using the supplied floppy disk or CD-ROM. The unit driver
and white calibration value are installed.
To set up and calibrate the CM-3630, you must select a user with Administrator privileges when
logging on to the computer.

30
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ When the CM-512m3A is connected

When the SpectraMagic NX is used on a PC connected to the CM-512m3A, do not press the BREAK

SpectraMagic
key of the CM-512m3A to exit remote mode. If you use the SpectraMagic NX on a computer

NX software

Starting the
connected to a CM-512m3A which is not in remote mode, the CM-512m3A may malfunction.

■ When the instrument is operating on batteries

If you attempt communication with the instrument and the power supply voltage applied to the
instrument is low, the SpectraMagic NX may suspend the operation while waiting for the response from
the instrument. In such a case, turn off the instrument. When a dialog box appears with a message “No
response from instrument”, click OK. Replace the batteries with new ones or connect the AC adapter,
and then select Connect again.

■ When using the PC with power supply control, standby settings, etc.
If the PC enters power saving mode while connected to the instrument, it may sometimes not be able to
communicate after recovering. In the event that this occurs, first disconnect the instrument using the
SpectraMagic NX software, then disconnect and reconnect the cable, and select Connect again.

Communication Setting
This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer or the chroma meter is connected and the
protection key is attached to the computer.
The SpectraMagic NX software communicates with the spectrophotometer or the chroma meter through
a serial port. You must specify the operating parameters of the serial port before establishing
communication with the instrument.
1. Select Instrument - Communication Setup from the menu bar.
The Serial Port Settings dialog box appears.

31
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2. Set the operating parameters.

When connecting via USB, select the COM port number to which the USB port connecting to the
SpectraMagic

instrument has been assigned. For the procedure to check the COM port number, refer to the Instal-
NX software
Starting the

lation Guide.
Select a port that is not being used by any other system or application. Otherwise, the SpectraMagic
NX software may not operate properly.
Refer to the instruction manual for your instrument and specify the parameters so that they match
the settings of your instrument.

Connecting multiple CM-700d/600d instruments

Once the communication with the first CM-700d/600d is established, the “Serial Port Settings” dia-
log box that opens when Instrument - Communication Setup is selected from the menu bar will be
similar to the one on the below.
Configure the COM port settings of the second and later instruments in this dialog.
With the second and later instruments, only the operations of “target remote measurement (page
70)”, “sample remote measurement (page 95)” and “display of the instrument screen for remote
measurement (page 196)” are available.

When two or more CM-700d/600d units are connected, the specular component mode (SCI, SCE, or
SCI+SCE) and measurement area (SAV (3 mm) and MAV (8 mm)) specified for the first-connected
instrument (instrument 1) are applied to the other connected instrument(s).

32
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Disconnecting from the spectrophotometer or the chroma meter

1. Select Instrument - Disconnect from the menu bar.

SpectraMagic
NX software

Starting the
The SpectraMagic NX software is disconnected from the instrument and the status of the instrument
is displayed in the status window. Once the instrument is disconnected, Connect appears in the
Instrument menu instead of Disconnect.

33
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.1.3 Setting Up the Instrument

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer or the chroma meter is connected and the
SpectraMagic
NX software
Starting the

protection key is attached to the computer.

1. Select Instrument - Instrument Settings from the menu bar.
The Instrument Settings dialog box appears.

2. Specify the settings of the instrument.

Only those items that can be specified for the instrument are displayed.
When a CM-36dG series instrument is connected, the Target Mask Auto Detection checkbox will
be displayed. When this checkbox is checked, the instrument will check the attached target mask
and adjust the measurement area automatically when necessary.
• When Target Mask Auto Detection is checked, verify that the Measurement Area indicated
here and on the instrument matches the actual attached target mask. If it does not, uncheck
Target Mask Auto Detection and set the measurement area manually.
When the CM-5 is connected, if you select SCI+SCE in Specular Component, you will run both SCI
and SCE measurements by performing a single measuring operation from SpectraMagic NX.
When a CM-36dG series instrument is connected, if UV adjustment has not been performed on the
instrument for the selected UV Setting at the selected Specular Component and Measurement Area
settings, an error message will appear and all settings will be reset to the settings at the time the
dialog was opened.
UV Cut: When active, determines how spectral reflectance at wavelengths below cutoff wavelength
(400nm or 420nm) set in UV Setting will be handled.
0(None): Spectral reflectances at wavelengths below the UV cutoff wavelength will be set to 0.
Copy cutoff wavelength reflectance: Spectral reflectances at wavelengths below the UV cutoff
wavelength will be set to the spectral reflectance at the UV cutoff wavelength.

Zero Cal. Skippable (CM-26dG/26d/25d, CM-25cG only): Enables/disables skipping of zero

calibration. (Instrument setting will not be synchronized.)
To measure opacity or haze, check Opacity/Haze Mode.
(Opacity is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only. If Specular Component
is set to SCI+SCE, if the Measurement Mode of the CM-36dG/CM-36dGV or CM-26dG is set to
“Color & Gloss”, or if remote measurement is enabled, Opacity/Haze Mode will be disabled.)
After the settings are entered, the new settings are displayed in the status window.
For details of instrument settings, refer to the instruction manual for the instrument.

34
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.2 Calibration
To ensure accurate measurement, you must perform white calibration before every measurement. Moreover,
when the spectrophotometer is used for the first time or is reset to its initial status, zero calibration is required.
For an instrument which retains the zero calibration result while the power is turned off, you do not have to
perform zero calibration every time the instrument is turned on.
White calibration, however, must be performed every time the instrument is turned on.

Calibration
The optional Zero Calibration Box allows more reliable zero calibration because it is not affected by the sur-
rounding environment.
For transmittance measurement, Zero Calibration and White Calibration are displayed as 0% Calibration and
100% Calibration respectively.

2.2.1 Calibrating the Instrument

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer or the chroma meter is connected and the
protection key is attached to the computer.
1. Select Instrument - Calibration from the menu bar.
The Zero Calibration dialog box appears.
If the CR-400 chroma meter, which doesn’t have a zero calibration function, is connected, the White
Calibration dialog box appears instead. Go to step 3.

2. Click the Zero Calibration button and perform zero calibration.

When zero calibration is completed, the White Calibration dialog box appears.
If you click the Skip button instead of the Zero Calibration button, the zero calibration process is
skipped and the White Calibration dialog box appears. If the status window displays “Zero Calibra-
tion is required” as the instrument status, do not skip zero calibration.
If a CM-26dG/26d/25d or CM-25cG is connected, the Skip button will be enabled only if Zero Cal.
Skippable is set to Enable in the Instrument Settings dialog. Zero calibration must always be
performed when switching between the Target Mask w/Glass and a target mask without glass.

35
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

3. Click the White Calibration button and perform white calibration.

White calibration is performed.
Calibration

Calibration Plate ID
for white calibration

If a CM-36dG series instrument with a valid Wavelength Analysis & Adjustment (WAA)
license is connected, a dialog with progress bars for white calibration and Wavelength Analysis
& Adjustment (WAA) will be shown. Performing both processes will take several seconds.

For transmittance measurements, two methods for performing 100% calibration are possible:
• 100% calibration to air:
When the specimen to be measured is in sheet or solid form, 100% calibration should be per-
formed with the transmittance chamber empty.
• 100% calibration to water:
When the specimen to be measured is in liquid form and will be measured using a cell, 100%
calibration should be performed using distilled (or pure) water in the same size and type cell as
will be used for measurements.
4. If a CM-36dG/CM-36dGV, CM-25cG or CM-26dG is connected and Color & Gloss is selected in
Measurement Mode in the Instrument Settings dialog, a dialog for Gloss Calibration will appear.
Click the Gloss Calibration button and perform gloss calibration.
Gloss calibration is performed.

■ Calibration time displayed in the status window

The calibration status information is retrieved from the instrument and the display in the status window
is updated to reflect the change. If the instrument has been calibrated without the SpectraMagic NX
software, the software might not be able to determine the time of the calibration performed by the
instrument itself. Consequently, the status window displays the time of the last calibration performed
with the SpectraMagic NX software.

36
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.3 Preparing for Measurement

2.3.1 Setting the Observer and Illuminant
The observer and illuminant are important items required for converting spectral data into colorimetric
data. The observer and illuminant must be identical to allow for comparison of colorimetric data from
several samples. It is recommended that the observer and illuminant be specified beforehand. They
should not be changed unnecessarily.
1. Select Data - Observer and Illuminant from the menu bar.
The Observer And Illuminant dialog box appears.

Measurement
Preparing for
2. Specify the observer and illuminant.

Only one pair of observer and illuminant can be specified for each document file. This setting does
not affect the observer and illuminant that have been specified with the instrument.
If the connected instrument is the CR Series, specify the observer and illuminant to match the
observer and illuminant set for the instrument.
Items for which specific observer and illuminant has been defined, such as index values, will be cal-
culated with the defined observer and illuminant regardless of the setting in this dialog box.

37
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Observer And Illuminant dialog box

Observer
Select either 2 degree or 10 degree.
Primary, Secondary, Tertiary
Select illuminant from None, A, C, D50, D55, D65, D75, F2, F6, F7, F8, F10, F11, F12, U50, ID50, ID65, User
1Ê, User 2Ê or User 3Ê.
None can be selected only for the secondary and tertiary illuminants.
When selecting one of User 1 to 3, specify the user illuminant data file to be used. When the Set
button is clicked, the Input illuminant data dialog is displayed. Ê
Ê The user illuminant function is supported by SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.
Measurement
Preparing for

The setting in this dialog box will be reflected in all data included in the document file.
When the observer or illuminant is changed, the SpectraMagic NX software recalculates all data.
When you attempt to change the observer or illuminant, the following message appears.

■ Input illuminant data dialog box

Ê This function is supported by SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.

Tag
A tag of 60 characters or less can be specified for the illuminant data.
Load
The specified file (extension: .lr5) is loaded and reflected on the input data. After the file is loaded,
the name of the file is automatically shown in the Tag field.

Save
The file is saved using the specified file path. The file extension is “.lr5”.

Input Data
The spectral data is displayed. You can edit the data by manually entering values directly.

38
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.3.2 UV Adjustment Ê
This procedure is available only when the CM-3700A, CM-3600A, CM-3610A, CM-3630,
CM-26dG/26d (firmware ver. 1.10 or later), or the CM-2600d is connected and the protection key is
attached to the computer.
This function is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.
• For the CM-36dG/CM-36dGV, UV adjustment is performed using the separate UV Adjustment
Software included with SpectraMagic NX. The SpectraMagic NX protection key must be
attached to the computer to use the UV Adjustment Software.
To perform UV adjustment, you must select a user with Administrator privileges when logging on to the

Measurement
Preparing for
computer.
1. Select Instrument - UV Adjustment from the menu bar.
This option can be selected only when the measurement method is set to “Reflectance”.
When the CM-2600d is used, this option can be selected only when the UV setting is set to “UV
adjust” or “100% Full + 400nm cut + UV adjust”.
The UV Adjustment Condition dialog box appears, showing the parameters of “Specular Compo-
nent”, “Measurement Area”, and “Adjustment Mode” depending on the connected instrument.

2. Select the Adjustment Mode and click the Next button.

Items selectable for “Adjustment Mode” vary depending on the connected instrument.
If a CM-26dG/26d is connected, "Specular Component" and "Measurement Area" can also be set.
3. A dialog box for the selected UV adjustment setting is displayed. Specify the parameters of the UV
adjustment by referring to the following pages.

39
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ UV Adjustment dialog box (Connected instrument: CM-3700A)

When “WI” is selected for “Adjustment Mode” in the Status dialog box
Measurement
Preparing for

Observer/Illuminant
The observer and illuminant used for calculation are displayed.
“Observer” is set to 10° and “Illuminant” is set to D65.

WI
Select “Value” from 40 to 250 and “Tolerance” from 0.20, 0.30, 0.50, 1.00, 2.00, and 3.00.

Last UV Adjust / Check

The data for the current settings after the last adjustment is displayed. When the Check button is
clicked, the current value is measured and calculated using the filter position of the last adjustment.
The obtained value is compared to the current setting value, and the filter position is set to the posi-
tion of the last adjustment.

UV Adjust
Clicking this button begins the UV adjustment.

40
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

When “Tint” is selected for “Adjustment Mode” in the Status dialog box

Measurement
Preparing for
Observer/Illuminant
The observer and illuminant used for calculation are displayed.
“Observer” is set to 10° and “Illuminant” is set to D65.

Tint
Select “Value” from -6 to 6 and “Tolerance” from 0.05, 0.10, and 0.30.

Last UV Adjust / Check

The data for the current settings after the last adjustment is displayed. When the Check button is
clicked, the current value is measured and calculated using the filter position of the last adjustment.
The obtained value is compared to the current setting value, and the filter position is set to the posi-
tion of the last adjustment.

UV Adjust
Clicking this button begins the UV adjustment.

41
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ UV Adjustment dialog box (Connected instrument: CM-3600A, CM-3610A,

CM-3630, CM-26dG/26d (firmware ver. 1.10 or later), or CM-2600d)

When “Tint”, “WI”, “Tint & WI” or “ISO Brightness” is selected for “Adjustment Mode”
in the Status dialog box
Measurement
Preparing for

Observer/Illuminant
The observer and illuminant used for calculation are displayed. (Not shown for "ISO Brightness".)
“Observer” is set to 10° and “Illuminant” is set to D65.
Load Coefficient
When this option is checked and Finish button is clicked, coefficient data are loaded from the file to
complete UV adjustment without performing measurements.
The file extension is “*.krd”.
Tint
Select “Value” from -6 to 6 and “Tolerance” from 0.05, 0.10, and 0.30. When “SCI” has been
set, only a value for
WI “SCI” can be
Select “Value” from 40 to 250 and “Tolerance” from 0.50, 1.00, and selected. When
“SCI+SCE” or “SCE”
3.00. has been set, values
for both “SCI” and
ISO Brightness “SCE” can be
Select “Value” from 40 to 250 and “Tolerance” from 0.50, 1.00, and selected.
3.00.
Save UV Result
When this option is checked, a dialog box is displayed for saving the coefficient after the UV adjust-
ment.
View Coefficient
The coefficient obtained by the UV adjustment is displayed.
Finish
Confirms the settings, and performs the UV adjustment.

42
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Ganz & Griesser dialog box (Connected instrument: CM-3600A, CM-3610A,

CM-3630, CM-26dG/26d (firmware ver. 1.10 or later), or CM-2600d)

When “Ganz&Griesser4” or “Ganz&Griesser5” is selected for “Adjustment Mode” in

the Status dialog box

Measurement
Preparing for
Load Coefficient
When this option is checked and Finish button is clicked, coefficient data are loaded from the file to
complete UV adjustment without performing measurements.
The file extension is “*.krd”.
WI When “SCI” has been
Select the values from 40 to 250. set, only values for
“SCI” can be selected.
Tint When “SCI+SCE” or
Select the values from -6 to 6. “SCE” has been set,
values for both “SCI”
Parameter and “SCE” can be
The values of parameters Phi, BW, D, P, Q, C, m, n and k are displayed. selected.

Save UV Result
When this option is checked, a dialog box is displayed for saving the coefficient after the UV adjust-
ment.
View Coefficient
The coefficient obtained by the UV adjustment is displayed.
Measure_1 to 5
Measurement is performed by using the index value corresponding to the number.
Finish
Confirms the settings, and performs the UV adjustment.

43
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Ganz & Griesser dialog box (Connected instrument: CM-3700A)

When “Ganz&Griesser4” or “Ganz&Griesser5” is selected for “Adjustment Mode” in
the Status dialog box
Measurement
Preparing for

WI
Select the values from 40 to 250.
Tint
Select the values from -6 to 6.
Parameter
The values of parameters Phi, BW, D, P, Q, C, m, n and k are displayed.
Measure_1 to 5
Measurement is performed by using the index value corresponding to the number.
UV Adjust
Performs UV adjustment. (The button will be enabled when Measure_1 to Measure_4 or Measure_5
have been completed.)
Last UV Adjust / Check
When the Check button is pressed, the date / time of the last Ganz & Griesser UV adjustment and
the parameters obtained at that time will be shown.

When Ganz & Griesser UV adjustment is performed using the CM-3700A, for a single sample or
target data 2 measurements are taken with the UV filter moved between the 2 measurements, so
approximately 25 seconds is required for each sample or target data.

44
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Edit UV Profile dialog box (Connected instrument: CM-3600A, CM-3610A,

CM-3630, CM-26dG/26d (firmware ver. 1.10 or later), or
CM-2600d)
When “Profile” is selected in the Status dialog box

Measurement
Preparing for
Load
The profile data is loaded from the file and is reflected in the dialog box.
The file extension is “*.pri” for SCI and “*.pre” for SCE.
Save
The items specified in the dialog box are saved in a file.
The file extension is “*.pri” for SCI and “*.pre” for SCE.
Gloss
The data to be edited can be changed.
When “SCI” has been set, only values for “SCI” can be selected. When “SCI+SCE” or “SCE” has
been set, values for both “SCI” and “SCE” can be selected.
Load Coefficient
When this option is checked and Finish button is clicked, coefficient data are loaded from the file to
complete UV adjustment without performing measurements.
The file extension is “*.krd”.
Save UV Result
When this option is checked, a dialog box is displayed for saving the coefficient after the UV adjust-
ment is displayed.
View Coefficient
The coefficient obtained by the UV adjustment is displayed.
Finish
Confirms the settings, and performs the UV adjustment.

45
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.3.3 Setting the List Items

Set the items shown in the list window such as data names and colorimetric data, and specify the order
in which the items are to be listed.
1. Select Data - List Items from the menu bar.
The List Items dialog box appears.
Measurement
Preparing for

2. Specify the details of the items shown in the list window.

Select an item in the left pane and You can change the order in which the
These icons indicate click the button to add the items are displayed in the list window.
the groups into item to the Selected Items pane The item at the top of this pane is dis-
which the list items on the right. played at the left side of the list win-
are to be classified. To delete an item from the dow. To change the order, select the
Selected Items, select the item item in the Selected Items and click
and click the button. the appropriate button.

The list items included in the group indicated by the icon

on the left are displayed.
When all necessary items are specified, click the OK button.

46
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ List Items dialog box

The following tables show the items selectable as list items and the content of each item displayed in the
list window.
Notes for items marked [*1] to [*12] are shown on pages 52 to 54.

Content displayed in list window

Attributes Data Name Name of data
Comment Comment
“Pass” or “Fail” (Available only for sample data. The string can
Judgement
be changed.)
“Measured spectral data”, “Manually input spectral data”, “Man-

Measurement
Preparing for
Attribute
ually input colorimetric data”
“SCI” or “SCE”
“UV100” or “UV0”
“White” or “Black” (for two banks)
Group Traits “25 degree”, “45 degree” or “75 degree”
“UV100”, “UV0” or “UVadj” (for three banks)
None (for one bank)
* See page 57 for details on bank setting.
Target No. No. assigned to linked target
Parameters l, c, and h used for calculating the color difference
Parameter equation (ΔE*94 (CIE 1994), ΔE00 (CIE 2000), CMC (l:c))
Name of the login user (Applicable only when the security func-
User Name
tion is enabled)
Supplementary data
Title specified to supplementary data information (See page 65.)
information
Visual Judgement Result of the visual judgement

Content displayed in list window

Spectral value
Spectral reflectance, Spectral reflectance difference, K/S Val, K/S
360 to 740 nm Val difference, Absorbance for selected wavelength, Absorbance
difference for selected wavelength

47
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Content displayed in list window

Instrument CM-3700A, CM-3700A-U, CM-36dG, CM-36dGV, CM-36d,
CM-3600A, CM-3610A, CM-3630, M-2600d, CM-2500d, CM-2500c,
Instrument Name CM-25cG, CM-26dG, CM-26d, CM-25d, CM-700d, CM-600d,
CM-512m3A, CM-5, CR-5, CR-400/410, DP-400, FD-7/FD-5

Instrument variation. If no variation informa-

Variation tion is received from the instrument, “----”
<These contents
will be shown.
may not be
Serial No. Serial No. of instrument displayed
Firmware Version ROM version of instrument depending on the
Last Calibration instrument being
Measurement

Day and time of the last white calibration

Preparing for

Date & Time connected.>

Timestamp Day and time of measurement
Measurement Type Reflectance, Transmittance
di:8, de:8, di:0, de:0, d:0, 45a:0, multi-angle
Geometry
* A degree symbol (°) is not displayed.
Specular Component SCI, SCE, SCI + SCE
Measurement area (ex., SAV, MAV, LMAV, LAV, etc.) at
Measurement Area time of measurement. Value shown depends on instrument.

100% Full, 400nm cut, UV adjust, 400 nm cut Normal, 400 nm

cut Low, 420 nm cut Normal, 420 nm cut Low, 100% Full +
400 nm cut, 100% Full + 420 nm cut, 100% Full + 400 nm cut +
UV Setting 400 nm cut Normal, 100% Full + 400 nm cut + 400 nm cut Low,
100% Full + 420 nm cut + 420 nm cut Normal, 100% Full +
420 nm cut + 420 nm cut Low, 100% Full + 400 nm cut + UV
adjust
Observer 2 degree, 10 degree
Illuminant 1 A, C, D50, D65, F2, F6, F7, F8, F10, F11, F12, ID50, ID65
Illuminant 2 None, A, C, D50, D65, F2, F6, F7, F8, F10, F11, F12, ID50, ID65
Data number specified in the instrument from which the sample
data was loaded (when the CM-2600d/2500d, CM-2500c,
CM-25cG, CM-26dG/26d/25d, CM-700d/600d, CM-512m3A,
Data Number CM-5/CR-5 or CR-400/410 is connected)
“----” (when the CM-3700A, CM-3700A-U, CM-36dG,
CM-36dGV, CM-36d, CM-3600A, CM-3610A or CM-3630 is
connected)
Comment Comment or name set for the data in the instrument
Temperature value obtained by the temperature detection func-
Temperature
tion (when the CM-512m3 is connected)
(CM-512m3A)
“ ---- ” (when an instrument other than CM-512m3 is connected)
User Calibration “ON”, “OFF” (when the CM-512m3A is connected)
(CM-512m3A) “ ---- ” (when an instrument other than CM-512m3A is connected)
Observer, Illuminant 1, and Illuminant 2 are shown only for colorimetric data. For spectral data
“----” will be shown.

48
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

D65 Absolute Color Equation Others

Data Difference
X dX dE*ab [*3] MI (DIN)
Y dY [*1] CMC(l:c) [*4] Pseudo Color
Z dZ [*1] dL-CMC [*4] Pseudo Color (Target)
L* dL* [*1] dC-CMC [*5] Strength Ê
a* da* [*1] dH-CMC [*5] Strength X Ê
b* db* [*1] dE*94(CIE 1994) <dE*94> [*5] Strength Y Ê
C* dC* [*1] dL-dE*94 (CIE 1994) <dL-dE*94> [*5] Strength Z Ê
h dH* [*1] dC-dE*94 (CIE 1994) <dC-dE*94> [*5] Pseudo Strength Ê
L99 dL99 [*1] dH-dE*94 (CIE 1994) <dH-dE*94> [*5] Pseudo Strength X Ê

Measurement
Preparing for
a99 da99 [*1] dE00(CIE 2000) <dE00> [*5] Pseudo Strength Y Ê
b99 db99 [*1] dL’-dE00 (CIE 2000) <dL'-dE00> [*5] Pseudo Strength Z Ê
C99 dC99 [*1] dC’-dE00 (CIE 2000) <dC'-dE00> Dominant Wavelength Ê
h99 dH99 [*1] dH’-dE00 (CIE 2000) <dH'-dE00> Excitation Purity Ê
x dx dEab(Hunter) [*6] 555 Ê
y dy dΕ99
u* du* FMC2 Ê
v* dv* dL(FMC2) Ê
u' du' dCr-g(FMC2) Ê
v' dv' dCy-b(FMC2) Ê
L (Hunter) dL (Hunter) NBS100 Ê
a (Hunter) da (Hunter) NBS200 Ê
b (Hunter) db (Hunter) dEc (degree) (DIN 6175-2) <dEc (deg.)>
[*2] Lightness dEp (degree) (DIN 6175-2) <dEp (deg.)>
[*2] Saturation
[*2] Hue
[*2] a* Evaluation
[*2] b* Evaluation

49
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Index Index Index Difference

Munsell C Hue (JIS Z8721 1964) <Munsell C Hue> dWI(CIE 1982) <dWI(CIE)>
Munsell C Value (JIS Z8721 1964) <Munsell C Value> dWI(ASTM E313-73) <dWI(E313-73)>
Munsell C Chroma (JIS Z8721 1964) <Munsell C Chroma> dWI(Hunter)
Munsell D65 Hue (JIS Z8721 1993) <Munsell D65 Hue> dWI(TAUBE)Ê
Munsell D65 Value (JIS Z8721 1993) <Munsell D65 Value> dWI(STENSBY)Ê
Munsell D65 Chroma (JIS Z8721 1993) <Munsell D65 Chroma> dWI(BERGER)Ê
WI(CIE 1982) <WI(CIE)> dWI(ASTM E313-98)(C)Ê <dWI(E313-98)(C)>
WI(ASTM E313-73) <WI(E313-73)> dWI(ASTM E313-98)(D50)Ê <dWI(E313-98)(D50)>
WI(Hunter) dWI(ASTM E313-98)(D65)Ê <dWI(E313-98)(D65)>
WI(TAUBE)Ê dWI(Ganz)Ê
Measurement
Preparing for

WI(STENSBY)Ê Tint diff.(CIE)Ê

WI(BERGER)Ê Tint diff.(ASTM E313-98)(C)Ê <Tint diff. (E313-98)(C)>
WI(ASTM E313-98)(C)Ê <WI(E313-98)(C)> Tint diff.(ASTM E313-98)(D50)Ê <Tint diff. (E313-98)(D50)>
WI(ASTM E313-98)(D50)Ê <WI(E313-98)(D50)> Tint diff.(ASTM E313-98)(D65)Ê <Tint diff. (E313-98)(D65)>
WI(ASTM E313-98)(D65)Ê <WI(E313-98)(D65)> Tint diff.(Ganz)Ê
WI(Ganz)Ê dYI(ASTM D1925) <dYI(D1925)>
Tint(CIE)Ê dYI(ASTM E313-73) <dYI(E313-73)>
Tint(ASTM E313-98)(C)Ê <Tint(E313-98)(C)> dYI(ASTM E313-98)(C)Ê <dYI(E313-98)(C)>
Tint(ASTM E313-98)(D50)Ê <Tint(E313-98)(D50)> dYI(ASTM E313-98)(D65)Ê <dYI(E313-98)(D65)>
Tint(ASTM E313-98)(D65)Ê <Tint(E313-98)(D65)> dYI(DIN 6167)(C)Ê
Tint(Ganz)Ê dYI(DIN 6167)(D65)Ê
YI(ASTM D1925) <YI(D1925)> dB(ASTM E313-73) <dB(E313-73)>
YI(ASTM E313-73) <YI(E313-73)> [*7] Brightness diff.(TAPPI T452)Ê <Brightness diff. (TAPPI)>
YI(ASTM E313-98)(C)Ê <YI(E313-98)(C)> [*7] Brightness diff.(ISO 2470)Ê <Brightness diff. (ISO)>
YI(ASTM E313-98)(D65)Ê <YI(E313-98)(D65)> [*8] Opacity diff.(ISO2471)
YI(DIN 6167)(C)Ê [*8] Opacity diff.(TAPPI T425 89% ) <Opacity diff.(T425)>
YI(DIN 6167)(D65)Ê [*8] Haze diff.(ASTM D1003-97)(A) <Haze diff. (D1003-97)(A)>
B(ASTM E313-73) <B(E313-73)> [*8] Haze diff.(ASTM D1003-97)(C) <Haze diff. (D1003-97)(C)>
[*7] Brightness (TAPPI T452)Ê <Brightness (TAPPI)> [*7] ISO Status A Density diff. BÊ <Status A diff. (B)>
[*7] Brightness (ISO 2470)Ê < Brightness (ISO)> [*7] ISO Status A Density diff. GÊ <Status A diff. (G)>
[*8] Opacity (ISO2471) [*7] ISO Status A Density diff. RÊ <Status A diff. (R)>
[*8] Opacity (TAPPI T425 89%) <Opacity (T425)> [*7] ISO Status T Density diff. BÊ <Status T diff. (B)>
[*8] Haze (ASTM D1003-97)(A) <Haze (D1003-97)(A)> [*7] ISO Status T Density diff. GÊ <Status T diff. (G)>
[*8] Haze (ASTM D1003-97)(C) <Haze (D1003-97)(C)> [*7] ISO Status T Density diff. RÊ <Status T diff. (R)>
[*7] ISO Status A Density BÊ <Status A(B)> dRx(C)Ê
[*7] ISO Status A Density GÊ <Status A(G)> dRx(D65)Ê
[*7] ISO Status A Density RÊ <Status A(R)> dRx(A)Ê
[*7] ISO Status T Density BÊ <Status T(B)> dRy(C)Ê
[*7] ISO Status T Density GÊ <Status T(G)> dRy(D65)Ê
[*7] ISO Status T Density RÊ <Status T(R)> dRy(A)Ê
Rx(C)Ê dRz(C)Ê
Rx(D65)Ê dRz(D65)Ê
Rx(A)Ê dRz(A)Ê
Ry(C)Ê Std. Depth diff. (ISO 105.A06)Ê <Std. Depth diff.>
Ry(D65)Ê Stain Test (ISO 105.A04E)(C)Ê <Stain Test (C)>
Ry(A)Ê Stain Test (ISO 105.A04E)(D65)Ê <Stain Test (D65)>
Rz(C)Ê Stain Test Rating (ISO 105.A04E) (C)Ê <Stain Test Rating (C)>
Rz(D65)Ê Stain Test Rating (ISO 105.A04E) (D65)Ê
Rz(A)Ê <Stain Test Rating (D65)>
Standard Depth (ISO 105.A06)Ê <Standard Depth> Grey Scale (ISO 105.A05)(C) <Grey Scale (C)>
[*9] GU <GU>
[*10] Gardner Grey Scale (ISO 105.A05)(D65) <Grey Scale (D65)>

50
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

[*10] Hazen (APHA) colour scale Grey Scale Rating (ISO 105.A05)(C) <Grey Scale Rating (C)>
[*10] lodine color number Grey Scale Rating (ISO 105.A05)(D65) <Grey Scale Rating (D65)>
[*10] European Pharmacopoeia K/S Strength (dE)(C) <K/S (dE)(C)>
European Pharmacopoeia (AUTO) K/S Strength (dL)(C) <K/S (dL)(C)>
European Pharmacopoeia (B) K/S Strength (dC)(C) <K/S (dC)(C)>
European Pharmacopoeia (BY) K/S Strength (dH)(C) <K/S (dH)(C)>
European Pharmacopoeia (Y) K/S Strength (da)(C) <K/S (da)(C)>
European Pharmacopoeia (GY) K/S Strength (db)(C) <K/S (db)(C)>
European Pharmacopoeia (R) K/S Strength (dE)(D65) <K/S (dE)(D65)>
[*10] US Pharmacopoeia K/S Strength (dL)(D65) <K/S (dL)(D65)>
K/S Strength (dC)(D65) <K/S (dC)(D65)>

Measurement
Preparing for
K/S Strength (dH)(D65) <K/S (dH)(D65)>
K/S Strength (da)(D65) <K/S (da)(D65)>
K/S Strength (db)(D65) <K/S (db)(D65)>
K/S Strength (Max Abs) <K/S (Max Abs)>
K/S Strength (Apparent) <K/S (Apparent)>
K/S Strength (User) <K/S (User)>
K/S Strength (Max Abs)[nm] <K/S (Max Abs)[nm]>
NC# (C)Ê
NC# Grade (C)Ê
NC# (D65)Ê
NC# Grade (D65)Ê
Ns (C)Ê
Ns Grade (C)Ê
Ns (D65)Ê
Ns Grade (D65)Ê
[*9] dGU <dGU>

Special Others
[*11] 8 degree gloss
[*12] User Equation 1
[*12] User Equation 2
[*12] User Equation 3
[*12] User Equation 4
[*12] User Equation 5
[*12] User Equation 6
[*12] User Equation 7
[*12] User Equation 8
[*13] Signal Color Index 1Ê
[*13] Signal Color Index 2Ê
[*13] Signal Color Index 3Ê
[*13] Signal Color Index 4Ê
[*13] Signal Color Index 5Ê
The characters in < > are the abbreviated names used by the SpectraMagic NX.
Items marked with Ê are supported only by SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition.
The items x, y, u', v', Δx, Δy, Δu' and Δv' are expressed to four decimal places. Other colorimetric data is
expressed to two decimal places.
The number of decimal places can be changed. See page 62 for details.
The SpectraMagic NX software enhances calculation accuracy by performing internal calculations with
numbers greater in magnitude than those actually displayed. Consequently, the least significant digit
displayed may differ from that of the instrument by one digit due to rounding or color space conversion.

51
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

When the number of banks is set to 2, a piece of data is displayed on two lines. When the number of
banks is set to 3, a piece of data is displayed on three lines. For details of the banks, see page 57.

[*1] Color difference equation which requires parameter setting. The parameters can be set in the Tol-
erance Settings dialog box. For details, refer to page 90.
[*2] The color assessment such as Yellow Contrast hue locus

lightness assessment is the de-

+b*
Hue assessment:
L* Yellowish

scription of the differences in Target data

hue or other factors from the

Lightness
assessment:
Bright

target color. See the conceptual Target

data
Sample
data
Measurement

diagram in the right.

Preparing for

b*
a* Contrast
assessment:
assessment: chroma
A lot of yellow
A lot of green locus
(linear)
Green Chroma Red
Sample [0,0] assessment:
-a* Hue assessment: Dull +a*
data
Greenish

Contrast chroma a*
locus (linear) Sample assessment:
data Less red
Target Lightness
data assessment: b*
Dark assessment:
Target A lot of blue
data

Chroma
assessment:
Vivid

-b*
Blue
Contrast hue locus

[*3] To add MI, use the Others tab for the secondary or tertiary illuminant. To display the metamerism
Others for the illuminant, set the primary illuminant as the reference light.
[*4] Pseudo Color is used to visualize the colorimetric value of the sample data or target data. The cell
in the list window is filled with the color. This provides visual feedback on the colorimetric value
of the data.
[*5] The Strength and Pseudo Strength are displayed only when target data and the sample data associ-
ated with the target data exist.
[*6] “555” is recognized as a character, and its statistical value is not calculated.
When using “555”, be sure to specify ΔL*, Δa*, and Δb*.
[*7] Brightness and density (ISO Status A, ISO Status T) are not displayed (“---” is displayed instead)
when sample data and target data include colorimetric values only.
[*8] Opacity and haze are displayed only when the opacity measurement mode or haze measurement
mode are specified respectively.
[*9] GU and dGU values will be shown only when measurements are taken with a CM-36dG,
CM-36dGV, CM-25cG or CM-26dG with the Measurement Mode in Instrument Settings set to
Color & Gloss.
[*10] The transmittance indices are displayed only when the CM-5/CR-5 is connected and measurement
is performed. The values to be displayed are not the transmittance indices calculated from the spec-
tral transmittance by SpectraMagic NX, but those are loaded from the CM-5/CR-5.
[*11] The item “8 degree gloss” is displayed in the list window only when the specular component is set
to SCI + SCE.

52
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

[*12]After a user equation is added, you can change its title. The equation can be specified in the follow-
ing procedure.

Measurement
Preparing for
Select the user equation moved in the Selected Items pane and click the Edit button. The user equation
input box at the bottom is enabled, allowing the input of the name and equation.
Save and Load buttons will also appear. A user equation can be saved to a file (extension: *.ued) by
clicking the Save button or loaded from a file by clicking the Load button.
The colorimetric data that can be used in a user equation are the data shown in the Selected Items pane
above. Select the item in the pane and click the Get Selection button. (The Get Selection button is not
enabled when you select an item that cannot comprise a user equation.)
Example: To input “√ ΔL*2+Δa*2+Δb*2 ”
1) Type “SQRT(”.
2) Select “ΔL*” from Selected Items.
3) Click the Get Selection button.
4) Type “✻✻2+”.
5) Select “Δa*” from Selected Items.
6) Click the Get Selection button.
7) Type “✻✻2+”.
8) Select “Δb*” from Selected Items.
9) Click the Get Selection button.
10) Type “✻✻2)”.
Operation when “L*” is selected:
[L*(D65)$0] is displayed in the text input box.
The section between [ and ] indicates the list item. If these symbols ([ ]) are deleted, the SpectraMagic NX
software cannot recognize the list item. A user equation that does not include a list item is not effective.
String “$0” indicates the group attribute of the data. Enter the appropriate value according to the
group attribute.
Group attribute String
None $0
SCI $SCI
SCE $SCE
25 degree $25D
45 degree $45D
75 degree $75D
UV100 $UVF
UV0 $UVC
UVadj $UVA
White $WHT
Black $BLK
After inputting the user equation in the text input box, click the Done button.

53
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

[*13]After a signal color index is added, it can be specified in the follwing procedure.
Measurement
Preparing for

Select the signal color index moved in the Selected Items pane and click the Edit button.
The Signal Color Index Settings dialog box appears. You can set the polygonal tolerance data here.

■ Signal Color Index Settings

Name
Up to 64 alphanumeric characters can be entered. If no name is specified, the user-defined tolerance
data setting cannot be completed.
Chroma
Enter a chromaticity point to add. A numerical value between 0.0001 and 1.0 can be entered or
selected.
Add
When this button is clicked, the chromaticity point is added to the data list.

54
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Spectral
Specify data to add as a spectral locus. A wavelength between 380 and 780 can be entered or
selected.
Add
When this button is clicked, the wavelengths specified at Start and End are added to the data list as
dominant wavelengths, and the intersection of the wavelengths and the spectral locus are added to
the data list as chromaticity points.
Delete
When the registered data in the data list is selected and this button is clicked, the data is deleted.
Edit

Measurement
Preparing for
When one of the items of registered data in the data list is selected and this button is clicked, the Edit
dialog box appears to allow you to edit the data.
Load
If any tolerance data has been saved, the file (extension: .otr) can be loaded and the setting displayed
on the screen.
Save
When this button is clicked, the setting is saved in a file (extension: .otr).

The format when displaying the signal color index judgment result in the list is set on the Signal Color
Index tab located on the List Format dialog box that is displayed by selecting Data - Judgement Format
on the menu bar.

55
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ List Format dialog box

Signal Color Index tab
Inside
Label: Sets the string displayed in the list window when the result is judged as inside for the
signal color index.
Text Color: Sets the text color for the above label displayed in the list window when the result is
judged as inside.
Background: Sets the background color for the above label displayed in the list window when the
result is judged as inside.
Outside
Measurement

Label: Sets the string displayed in the list window when the result is judged as outside for the
Preparing for

signal color index.

Text Color: Sets the text color for the above label displayed in the list window when the result is
judged as outside.
Background: Sets the background color for the above label displayed in the list window when the
result is judged as outside.
Judgement
Include Signal Color Index results into the Total Judgement:
When this is checked, the results for Signal Color Index items included in the list win-
dow affects the total judgement result.
Signal Color Index 1 to 5:
The results for the checked items will affect the total judgement result.

56
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.3.4 Bank Setting

The data obtained by the simultaneous measurement of SCI+SCE with a CM-36dG, CM-36dGV,
CM-36d, CM-3600A, CM-3610A, CM-5, CM-26dG/26d/25d,
CM-2600d/2500d or CM-700d/600d requires two spaces (banks) of the data obtained by the individual
SCI or SCE specular component treatment.
The data obtained with a CM-36dG, CM-36dGV, CM-36d, CM-3600A, CM-3610A, CM-3630 or
CM-2600d by simultaneous measurement using the UV100% + UV0% + UV adjustment requires
spaces (banks) for three pieces of data. Such data is called “data of three banks”.
(Measurement using UV adjustment is supported by the Professional Edition only.)

Measurement
When the CM-512m3A is used for measurement, the data of multi-angles (25 degree, 45 degree, and 75

Preparing for
degree) is also obtained. Consequently, such data requires three spaces (banks) and is called “data of
three banks”.
Opacity/Haze measurements require two banks of data.
A single data file can store only the data of the same number of banks.
A single data file also can store only the data of the same type. For example, a data file of two banks can
store the data of SCI + SCE, or UV100% + UV 0% or Opacity/Haze. A data file of three banks can store
the data of multi-angles (25 degrees, 45 degrees, 75 degrees) or UV100% + UV0% + UV adjustment.
During measurement, the number of banks for the file is determined based on the number of banks of
the sample data. If you enter target data manually before measurement, you need to specify the number
of banks in the Bank dialog box.
■ Bank dialog box

Number of bank:
Select the number of banks from 1, 2 or 3.
This dialog box can be displayed by selecting File - Property from the menu bar.

57
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

To customers upgrading to Ver. 1.3 of the SpectraMagic NX from a former

version
With Ver. 1.3, group attributes are not displayed when the number of banks is specified as one. When a
data file created with a former version is opened with Ver. 1.3, the existing group attribute is displayed.
When data is added with Ver. 1.3, however, the group attribute for the data is not displayed.
Measurement
Preparing for

58
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.3.5 Setting the Assessment Format shown in the List

1. Select Data - Judgement Format from the menu bar.
The List Format dialog box appears.

Measurement
Preparing for
2. Select the Color Assessment Tab and specify the parameters of the assessment format.

■ List Format dialog box

Color Assessment tab
Show only assessment text
When this option is checked, only the assessment text is displayed.
Lightness
lighter
Text Color: Specify the text color of the lightness assessment result shown in the list window when
the color is bright.
Background: Specify the background color of the lightness assessment result shown in the list win-
dow when the color is bright.

darker
Text Color: Specify the text color of the lightness assessment result shown in the list window when
the color is dark.
Background: Specify the background color of the lightness assessment result shown in the list win-
dow when the color is dark.
59
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Saturation
less saturated
Text Color: Specify the text color of the chroma assessment result shown in the list window when
the color is dull.
Background: Specify the background color of the chroma assessment result shown in the list win-
dow when the color is dull.

more saturated
Text Color: Specify the text color of the chroma assessment result shown in the list window when
the color is vivid.
Background: Specify the background color of the chroma assessment result shown in the list win-
Measurement
Preparing for

dow when the color is vivid.

Hue
redder
Text Color: Specify the text color of the hue assessment result shown in the list window when the
color is reddish.
Background: Specify the background color of the hue assessment result shown in the list window
when the color is reddish.
yellower
Text Color: Specify the text color of the hue assessment result shown in the list window when the
color is yellowish.
Background: Specify the background color of the hue assessment result shown in the list window
when the color is yellowish.
greener
Text Color: Specify the text color of the hue assessment result shown in the list window when the
color is greenish.
Background: Specify the background color of the hue assessment result shown in the list window
when the color is greenish.
bluer
Text Color: Specify the text color of the hue assessment result shown in the list window when the
color is bluish.
Background: Specify the background color of the hue assessment result shown in the list window
when the color is bluish.
a* Evaluation
redder/less red
Text Color: Specify the text color of the a* evaluation result shown in the list window when the
color contains a lot of red or less red.
Background: Specify the background color of the a* evaluation result shown in the list window
when the color contains a lot of red or less red.
greener/less green
Text Color: Specify the text color of the a* evaluation result shown in the list window when the
color contains a lot of green or less green.
Background: Specify the background color of the a* evaluation result shown in the list window
when the color contains a lot of green or less green.

60
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

b* Evaluation
yellower/less yellow
Text Color: Specify the text color of the b* evaluation result shown in the list window when the
color contains a lot of yellow or less yellow.
Background: Specify the background color of the b* evaluation result shown in the list window
when the color contains a lot of yellow or less yellow.
bluer/less blue
Text Color: Specify the text color of the b* evaluation result shown in the list window when the
color contains a lot of blue or less blue.
Background: Specify the background color of the b* evaluation result shown in the list window
when the color contains a lot of blue or less blue.

Measurement
Preparing for

61
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.3.6 Setting the Number of Decimal Places for List Items

For list items that are represented by numbers, the number of decimal places can be specified
individually.
1. Select Data - Decimal Places from the menu bar.
The Decimal Places for List dialog appears.
Measurement
Preparing for

2. Specify the number of decimal places for the applicable list items.

■ Decimal Places for List dialog box

List Item
Items specified as list items are displayed in the pull-down list box. To specify the number of deci-
mal places for an item, select that item.
Measurement Data
Number of Decimals
Numerical values between 0 and 8 can be entered or selected.
Standard Deviation
Number of Decimals
Numerical values between 0 and 8 can be entered or selected.

62
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.3.7 Setting the Measurement Options

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer or the chroma meter is connected and the
protection key is attached to the computer.
1. Select Instrument - Measurement Options from the menu bar.
The Measurement Mode dialog box appears.

Measurement
Preparing for
2. Specify the parameters for the auto-averaging measurement and calibration interval.

■ Measurement Mode dialog box

Auto Averaging
Enable Averaging
When this box is checked, the SpectraMagic NX software performs automatic averaging measure-
ment. See page 98 for details of automatic averaging measurement.
This function enables the SpectraMagic NX software to perform automatic averaging measurement
without use of the function provided with the instrument. The maximum number of averagings is
1,000.
Interval Measurement Setting Ê
Interval Measurement
When this box is checked, the SpectraMagic NX software performs interval measurement. See page
96 for details of interval measurement.
Number: A number between 2 and 1000 can be entered or selected.
Interval: A time between 00:00:00 and 12:00:00 can be entered or selected in units of 10 seconds.
Move the cursor onto each of hour/minute/second and specify the value respectively.
Ê This function is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.
These methods can also be combined. Note, however, that you cannot use interval measurement in
connection with manual averaging measurement.

63
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Calibration Interval Setting

Next Calibration Interval
When the time specified here has passed since the last white calibration performed with the Spectra-
Magic NX software, a message appears to recommend white calibration. Time between 01:00 (1
hour) to 24:00 (24 hours) can be entered.

2.3.8 Setting Auto-naming

1. Select Data - Supplementary data information from the menu bar.
Measurement
Preparing for

2. Select the Auto Naming tab and specify the parameters for auto naming.

■ Data information dialog box

Auto Naming
Target
When this box is checked, the name of target data is assigned automatically during measurement.

Sample
When this box is checked, the name of sample data is assigned automatically during measurement.

When this box is checked, data is automatically named during measurement. Specify the format of
the name to be automatically assigned. The strings in the following tables are treated as special sym-
bols. They are replaced with the string indicating the corresponding data.

String Corresponding data

$N Automatically created number (serial number) assigned to a sample.
(The first number in the series can be specified between 0 and 9999.)

64
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

String Corresponding data

$D Day of measurement
$M Month of measurement
$Y Year of measurement
$h Hour of measurement
$m Minute of measurement
$s Second of measurement
Enter a combination of these strings in the text box. Up to 40 alphanumeric characters can be used.
The following two strings are provided as sample formats and can be selected from the pull-down
combo box.

Measurement
Preparing for
Sample#$N
$D/$M/$Y-$h:$m:$s

2.3.9 Specifying supplementary information of data Ê

This function is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.
You can specify supplementary data information to describe a variety of information that cannot be
represented by a data name only. The specified data information pieces are displayed in the list window
as list items.
This setting is recorded for each document file (data file), and it is stored in a template file. For details
of a template file, refer to page 133.
1. Select Data - Supplementary data information from the menu bar.
The Data Information dialog box appears.

2. Select the Label tab or Numerical tab and specify details for the supplementary information of the data.

65
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Data Information dialog box

Label tab, Numerical tab
Supplementary data information is specified as character strings on the Label tab and as numerical
values on the Numerical tab.

Show the Information in the Comment Dialog box

When this box is checked, supplementary data information is shown in the Name dialog box dis-
played during measurement.

Title
Enter the title of the supplementary data information in the text box. Up to 30 alphanumeric charac-
Measurement
Preparing for

ters can be used.

You can edit the title that was entered previously. You can also delete a title by selecting the row and
pressing the Delete key. Up to 200 titles can be added on the Label and Numerical tabs respectively.

Item
When the Item column of a specified title is selected, the Add/Remove Item button is enabled. Dis-
play the Add/Remove Item dialog box by clicking the Add/Remove Item button, and add or delete
items.
The items specified in this dialog box are displayed in the list box that appears when supplementary
information is specified to each item of data. You can select a desired item from the list box.
Now the items specified in the Add/Remove Item dialog box are displayed in the list box for the
Item column.
When you copy data to another document file and supplementary data information has been speci-
fied to the data, the title is not copied. The title to be displayed is the one specified in the destination
document file, and only the items specified in the source document file are copied.

■ Add/Remove Item dialog box

Adding items
Enter an item to be added in the text box on the left of the Add Item button, and then click the but-
ton. The item is displayed at the top of the list box.
You can add as many items as you want by repeating this procedure. The order of the items can be
changed by selecting one and clicking the Up or Down button.
Deleting items
Select the item to be deleted in the list box, and then click the Remove Item button.
66
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

To use supplementary data information stored in a template file

When a template file (.mtp) storing supplementary data information is reflected to a data file (.mes),
the supplementary data information of the data file is overwritten with the supplementary data
infor-mation of the template file.
If the data file has more supplementary data information than the template file, the excess informa-
tion is not overwritten. If such supplementary data information has the same name as the informa-
tion in the template file, a tilde ( ˜ ) is suffixed to the title. The number of tildes is not limited as
long as titles with the same name exist. (See below.)
Data file (before copying) Template file Data file (after copying)
Title 1 Title 4 Title 4
+ =

Measurement
Title 2 Title 5 Title 5

Preparing for
Title 3 Title 6 Title 6
Title 4 Title 4˜
Title 5 Title 5˜
Title 6 Title 6˜
Title 7 Title 7

2.3.10 Sample Viewer

This function is available only on the CM-36dG, CM-36dGV, or CM-36d. Sample Viewer helps in
positioning the measurement subject for measurements. It shows a real-time view of the measurement
subject from inside the instrument, with the measurement area clearly indicated using a dotted circle.
The Sample Viewer will be disabled in the following cases:
• When Transmittance is set for Refl./Trns.
• When Opacity/Haze mode is selected.
• When the instrument has not yet been calibrated
• When Interval Measurement is enabled.
To open the Sample Viewer, select Instrument - Sample Viewer from the menu bar.

To take a target measurement, click the Measure Target button.

To take a sample measurement, click the Measure Sample button.
To copy the image to the Windows clipboard, click the Copy Image button.

67
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.4 Specifying Target Data/Tolerance

2.4.1 Registering Target Data
Register the target data to be used for color difference measurement. When only absolute values are
measured, it is unnecessary to register target data.
The several methods available for registering target data are shown below:

■ Registering target data by performing a measurement

Target measurement:
Perform a measurement by triggering the SpectraMagic NX software to take a measurement and
obtain the sample data as target data.
Target remote measurement:
Target Data/

Perform measurement by pressing the measuring button of the instrument. The SpectraMagic NX
Specifying

Tolerance

software receives the sample data as target data.

If the CM-36dG, CM-36dGV, or CM-36d is connected, pressing the measuring button once
performs the number of measurements set for Auto Averaging (up to 10 measurements maximum).
If the CM-25cG, CM-26dG/26d/25d, CM-2600d/2500d, CM-700d/600d or CM-5/CR-5 is
connected, pressing the measuring button once performs measurement up to the number of auto
averagings set on the instrument. If a different instrument is connected, measurement is only
performed once.

Target interval measurement: Ê

Start measurement by triggering the SpectraMagic NX software once to take a measurement using
the interval time and number of measurements specified in advance. The measured sample data is
received as target data after every measurement.
Ê This function is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.

Target automatic averaging measurement:

Start measurement by triggering the SpectraMagic NX software once to take a measurement. After
the specified number of measurements has been performed, the collected sample data is averaged to
provide the target data.
Target manual averaging measurement:
Select the target manual averaging measurement mode. Repeat the measurements for the desired
number of times and exit the mode. The sample data collected during the period is averaged to
provide the target data.
The above methods can also be combined to provide target data. Note that you cannot use the target
interval measurement in connection with the target manual averaging measurement.

■ Manual data input

Input data manually from the existing data sheet and use it as the target data.

■ Uploading target data from the instrument

Upload the target data stored in the memory of the instrument to the SpectraMagic NX software.

■ Copying target data from existing data

Copy sample data or target data in the same or different document file and use it as the target data.

68
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.4.1-a Performing Target Measurement

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer or the chroma meter is connected and the
protection key is attached to the computer.
• Target measurement can also be performed from the Sample Viewer dialog. See page 67.

1. Select Instrument - Measure Target from the menu bar.

The Name dialog box appears.
If auto-naming is activated, the Name dialog box will not appear. Skip this process and go to step 3.
To assign a comment to each piece of sample data, select All Data - Target(s) in the list window after
the measurement and choose the data from the displayed data group. Then select Data - Data Prop-
erty from the menu bar and type the comment in the displayed dialog box. (See page 104.)

2. Enter the name of the data.

You can assign a name, supplementary data information Ê and a comment for each piece of sample
data. (See page 70.)

Target Data/
Select a supplementary data information item every time you measure.

Specifying
Tolerance
Items marked with Ê are supported only by SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition.

(Sample display of the Professional Edition)

3. Click the OK button.

When the opacity/haze measurement mode is set, measurements using a white background and a
black background are conducted in succession.
Data is added to the list window.

69
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Name dialog box

Name tab
Data Name
Name: Up to 64 alphanumeric characters can be used for the name.
Supplementary Data Information Ê
The titles specified on the Label and Numerical tabs of the Data Information dialog box are dis-
played. (See page 66.)
Enter items in the Item column. If an item has been specified in the Data Information dialog box (see
page 66), you can select one from the list box.
Data Comment
Comment: Up to 256 alphanumeric characters can be used for the comment.

Auto Naming tab

Auto Naming
Target data can be automatically named during measurement. Specify the format of the name to be
Target Data/
Specifying

Tolerance

automatically assigned. See page 64 for details.

Items marked with Ê are supported only by SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition.

2.4.1-b Performing Target Remote Measurement

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer, excluding the CM-3000 Series, or the
chroma meter is connected and the protection key is attached to the computer.
1. Select Instrument - Remote Measurement - Target Remote Measurement from the menu bar.
Checking this option enables remote measurement of target data. When this option is selected, the
measurement can be triggered either with the measuring button of the instrument or with the mea-
suring command of the SpectraMagic NX software.
This option cannot be selected in the Opacity/Haze mode.

■ Target Remote Measurement and Sample Remote Measurement

Target Remote Measurement and Sample Remote Measurement cannot be selected simultaneously.
If you select Sample Remote Measurement while Target Remote Measurement is checked, Target
Remote Measurement will become unchecked and a check mark will appear for Sample Remote
Measurement. If you select Sample Remote Measurement again, the check mark disappears and
Sample Remote Measurement is deselected.

70
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

When the CM-5 is connected

If Specular Component is set to SCI+SCE in Instrument settings, Target Remote Measurement cannot
be performed.

When the CM-700d/600d is connected

By setting options in advance, the results of the measurement or pass/fail judgment for the "target
remote measurement" and "sample remote measurement" can be displayed on the LCD screen of the
instrument. For the procedure of the advance setting, refer to page 196.

When a CM-2600-, CM-512m3A, or CR-400-Series instrument is connected

If the instrument's Communication Mode is canceled and then set again using instrument controls,
Target Remote Measurement will be canceled on the instrument. When this occurs, uncheck Target
Remote Measurement and then check it again to re-enable Target Remote Measurement.

Target Data/
Specifying
Tolerance
When a CM-26dG/26d with firmware earlier than ver. 1.2 is connected
If UV Settings in Instrument Settings is set to 100% Full + 400nm cut or 100% Full + 400nm cut + UV
Adjust, Target Remote Measurement cannot be performed.

2.4.1-c Performing Target Interval Measurement Ê

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer or the chroma meter is connected and the
protection key is attached to the computer.
This function is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.
1. Select Instrument - Measurement Options from the menu bar.
The Measurement Mode dialog box appears.
Check Interval Measurement and specify the options for the interval measurement.
The interval measurement repeats measurement a specified number of times at specified intervals.
The measured sample data is received as target data after every measurement.

71
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE
Target Data/
Specifying

Tolerance

■ Measurement Mode dialog box

See “Measurement Mode dialog box” on page 63.
2. Click the OK button.
3. Perform the measurement described on page 69.
The Measurement dialog box appears and interval measurement is performed.
During interval measurement, data is added to the list window after every measurement.

2.4.1-d Performing Target Automatic Averaging Measurement

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer or the chroma meter is connected and the
protection key is attached to the computer.
1. Select Instrument - Measurement Options from the menu bar.
The Measurement Mode dialog box appears.
Check “Enable Averaging” to enable automatic averaging measurement of target data.

72
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

During automatic averaging measurement of target data, the measurement is repeated the specified
number of times. When the measurement is completed, the sample data is averaged to provide one piece
of target data.

Target Data/
Specifying
Tolerance
■ Measurement Mode dialog box
See “Measurement Mode dialog box” on page 63.

2.4.1-e Performing Manual Averaging Measurement

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer or the chroma meter is connected and the
protection key is attached to the computer.
1. Select Instrument - Averaged Measurement - Target Averaged Measurement from the menu bar.
The Target Averaged Measurement dialog box appears.

When the CM-36dG, CM-36dGV, or CM-36d is connected, clicking

Show Sample Viewer will open the Sample Viewer panel (indicated by
red dotted-line rectangle above) showing a real-time view of the
measurement subject from inside the instrument to help in accurately
positioning the subject. Clicking Hide Sample Viewer will hide the
Sample Viewer panel.

2. Repeatedly click the Measure button to perform the measurement the desired number of times.
When the opacity/haze measurement mode is set, measurements using a white background and a
black background are conducted.
The sample data is displayed in the dialog box.
The average and standard deviation are calculated and displayed for each measurement.
The data with a check mark is used for average calculation.

73
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Uncheck data that you do not want to include in the average calculation, such as abnormal values.
Target Data/
Specifying

Tolerance

3. Click the End button.

The average is added to the list window as one piece of target data.

■ Target Averaged Measurement dialog box

Color space drop-down list box
Select from L*a*b*, XYZ, L*c*h, Hunter Lab, Yxy, L*u*v*, and L*u'v' as the color space to be dis-
played in the list.

When the CM-36dG, CM-36dGV, or CM-36d is

connected, the Sample Viewer panel (indicated by red
dotted-line rectangle above) will be shown when Show
Sample Viewer has been clicked.

74
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Retrieve checked data besides averaged result

When this option is checked, the data with a check mark is also added to the list window as individ-
ual target data.

Option
Clicking this button displays a dialog box used for specifying options for the averaging measurement.

Show Sample Viewer/Hide Sample Viewer

(Shown only when CM-36dG, CM-36dGV, or CM-36d is connected)
Shows/hides the Sample Viewer panel.

Copy Image (in Sample Viewer panel)

Copies the sample viewer image to the Windows clipboard.

Select All
Selects and checks all the sample data.

Target Data/
Unselect All

Specifying
Tolerance
Leaves all the sample data unchecked.

■ Average Measurements: Options dialog box

• Any changes to settings in this dialog box will not take effect for this measurement. They will take
effect the next time the Target Averaged Measurement or Sample Averaged Measurement dialog
box is opened.

Inspection
Automatically end measurements when standard deviation is within value below
When this option is checked, the measurement is terminated automatically when the standard devia-
tion becomes lower than the threshold value.
The input range is between 0.001 and 1.
When Eliminate maximum and minimum values. in Eliminate outliers has been specified, the stan-
dard deviation is determined after the Eliminate maximum and minimum values operation.

Eliminate outliers
Eliminate maximum and minimum values
When this option is checked, the maximum and minimum values are monitored during the manual
averaging measurement, and the averaging sample data is determined after the maximum and mini-
mum values are deleted from the result of the averaging measurement.
When this option is specified, the manual averaging measurement finishes only after the measure-
ment is repeated at least three times. The data of the maximum and minimum values are displayed in
red, and they cannot be checked.

75
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

SMC (Disabled if connected instrument is CR-5 or CR-400/410)

When this is checked, statistical measurement control will be performed and the measurement
sequence will automatically end when the σΔE*ab equivalent for the specified Number of valid data
is equal to or less than the specified Standard deviation value.
• If the maximum of the specified Number of valid data + 4 measurements have been taken with-
out meeting the specified Number of valid data and Standard deviation, an error message will
appear and the measurement sequence will end without adding measurement data to the docu-
ment.

Comment input dialog display

Specify whether to display the comment input screen before or after the measurement.

2.4.1-f Registering Target by Manual Data Input

Entering spectral data
Target Data/
Specifying

Tolerance

1. Select Data - Input Spectral Target from the menu bar.

Unless the number of banks has already been set for the file through measurement, the Bank dialog
box appears. See page 57 for details on bank setting.
The Input Spectral Target dialog box appears.

2. Type the spectral data.

When Bank is set to 2, select SCIE, UVINOUT, or OPACITY at BANK ID, and select SCI or SCE,
UV100 or UV0, or White or Black at Group Traits and specify the tolerance respectively. When
Bank is set to 3, select UVADJ or TRIPPLE at Bank ID, and select UV100, UV0 or UVadj, or 25
degree, 45 degree or 75 degree at Group Traits and specify the tolerance respectively.

76
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

3. Click the OK button.

The Name dialog box appears.
If auto-naming is activated, the Name dialog box does not appear. Skip this process and go to step 5.
To assign a comment, select All Data - Target(s) in the list window after registration and choose the
data from the displayed data group. Then select Data - Data Property from the menu bar and type
the comment in the displayed dialog box. (See page 104.)
4. Enter the name of the data.
You can assign a name, supplementary data information Ê and a comment for each piece of sample
data. (See page 70.)
Items marked with Ê are supported only by SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition.

Target Data/
Specifying
Tolerance
(Sample display of the Professional Edition)
5. The data is added to the list window.

77
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Entering colorimetric data

1. Select Data - Input Colorimetric Target from the menu bar.
Unless the number of banks has already been set during measurement, the Bank dialog box appears.
See page 57 for details on bank setting.
The Target Input dialog box appears.
Target Data/
Specifying

Tolerance

2. Select the color space and type the colorimetric data.

When Bank is set to 2, select SCIE, UVINOUT, or OPACITY at BANK ID, and select SCI or SCE,
UV100 or UV0, or White or Black at Group Traits and specify the tolerance respectively. When
Bank is set to 3, select UVADJ or TRIPPLE at Bank ID, and select UV100, UV0 or UVadj, or 25
degree, 45 degree or 75 degree at Group Traits and specify the tolerance respectively.

3. Click the OK button.

The Name dialog box appears.
If auto-naming is activated, the Name dialog box does not appear. Skip this process and go to step 5.
To assign a comment, select Data - Data Property from the menu bar after registration and type the
comment in the displayed dialog box. (See page 104.)

78
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

4. Enter the name of the data.

You can assign a name, supplementary data information Ê and a comment for each piece of sample
data. (See page 70.)
Items marked with Ê are supported only by SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition.

Target Data/
Specifying
Tolerance
(Sample display of the Professional Edition)

5. The data is added to the list window.

■ Input Colorimetric Target dialog box

Color Space Selection
Specify the color space to be used for manual data input. Selectable color spaces are XYZ, L*a*b*
and Hunter Lab only.
Target data of primary/secondary/tertiary illuminant
Type the value of the selected colorimetric data.

Note: The illuminant cannot be changed after the target colorimetric data is manually input.

79
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.4.1-g Uploading Target Data from the Instrument

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer, excluding the CM-36dG Series or
CM-3000 Series, or the chroma meter is connected and the protection key is attached to the computer.
The target data stored in the memory of the instrument can be uploaded to the SpectraMagic NX
software.
1. Select Instrument - Upload/Download - Upload Target from the menu bar.
If the CM-26dG/26d/25d, CM-2600d/2500d or CM-700d/600d is connected and if the number of
banks has not been set for the file through measurement, the Bank dialog box appears. See page 57 for
details on bank setting.
If the CM-2600d/2500d is connected and its ROM version is Ver. 1.21, the Language Environment
of Instrument dialog box appears. Specify the display language to be used for the instrument and
click the OK button.
Target Data/
Specifying

Tolerance

2. Uploading starts.
When the CM-2600d/2500d, CM-2500c, CM-25cG, CM-26dG/26d/25d, CM-700d/600d or CM-5/
CR-5 is connected, the Target Data to upload dialog box appears. Data with a check mark will be
uploaded. Uncheck the unneeded data.
Note that the data cannot be checked when the target data is colorimetric data and when the illumi-
nant and observer settings are different from those currently specified with the SpectraMagic NX
software. If the CM-26dG/26d/25d, CM-2600d/2500d, or CM-700d/600d is connected, data cannot
be checked for which the specified number of banks or group traits (CM-26dG/26d/25d only) setting
is different from the setting specified for the current file.
If the CM-25cG or CM-26dG is connected, data measured in “Gloss only” measurement mode (data
for which L*a*b* data are shown as “-” in the upload dialog box) cannot be checked.
If the CM-25cG or CM-26dG/26d/25d is connected, it is not possible to upload the same target
twice to the same document.

80
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

If the CM-26dG/26d/25d is connected and the number of banks is set to 2, select the desired BankID
("SCIE" for Group Traits: SCI/SCE or "OPACITY" for Group Traits: White/Black) from the
BankID pull-down list.

Sample display when

the CM-2600d/2500d,
CM-2500c, CM-25cG,

Target Data/
CM-26dG/26d/25d,

Specifying
Tolerance
CM-700d/600d or CM-
5/CR-5 is connected

3. Click the OK button to begin uploading.

■ Target Data to upload dialog box (only when the CM-2600d/2500d,

CM-2500c, CM-25cG, CM-26dG/26d/25d, CM-700d/600d or CM-5/CR-5 is con-
nected)
BankID (CM-26dG/26d/25d only): Select the desired BankID ("SCIE" for Group Traits: SCI/SCE
or "OPACITY" for Group Traits: White/Black).
Select All: All target data check boxes are selected.
Unselect All: All target data check boxes are cleared.

81
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.4.1-h Copying Target from the Existing Data

For data copy and paste procedures, see page 113.

2.4.2 Specifying the Target Data

Specify the target data used for color difference measurement from the target data stored in the
document file. When only absolute values are measured, it is not necessary to specify target data.

2.4.2-a Selecting Specific Target Data

Select the specific target data from the Classification by Target folder in the tree appearing in the list
window.
Target Data/
Specifying

Tolerance

Or, select the specific target data from the Select Target box in the toolbar.
To add the Select Target box to the toolbar, see the procedure on page 126.

2.4.2-b Auto Target

1. Select Data - Auto Target from the menu bar.

Or, right-click the Classification by Target folder in the tree of the list window and select Auto Tar-
get from the displayed context menu.
The Target Selection Mode dialog box appears.

2. In the Mode frame, select Auto target selection and click the OK button.

82
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Target Selection Mode dialog box

Details
Group
If the number of banks is set to 2 or 3, you can select group traits to be used for the judgment of the
minimum color difference value.

Max Value
Up to 20 limits can be set for the color difference to be used for judgment.
Among all target data, the data with the minimum ΔE*ab or other color difference value within the
maximum range specified here is specified as the target data for color difference measurement. If
there is no such data, the target data for color difference measurement is not specified, and the
sample data will be saved in “Absolute Data” among the folders classified according to target data.

When Auto target seleciton is selected, the piece of data with the minimum ΔE*ab or other color dif-
ference value (selectable) among all target data after measurement is specified as the target data for

Target Data/
Specifying
Tolerance
color difference measurement.
Application: Simple CCS
It is useful to create a document file of this setting for a database file of target data.
See page 132 for details of document files (data files).

If Bank is set to Bank 2 or Bank 3, you can select group traits to be used for the judgment of the min-
imum color difference value.

2.4.2-c CCS Ê
This function is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.
To use the CCS, set the CCS condition beforehand.
1. Select Data-Auto Target from the menu.

Or, right-click the Classification by Target folder in the tree of the list window and select Auto
Target from the displayed context menu.
The Target Selection Mode dialog box appears.

2. In the Mode frame, select CCS, specify the number of target data pieces used for the CCS (2 to 10)
and click the OK button.
When the CCS is set, the Closest Color System dialog box appears after the measurement, and the
target data pieces of the specified number are displayed in increasing order of color difference for
the primary illuminant such as ΔE*ab (selectable) among all target data. Select target data used for
color difference measurement from these candidates.

83
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Target Selection Mode dialog box

Details
Group
If the number of banks is set to 2 or 3, you can select group traits to be used for the judgment of the
minimum color difference value.
Target Data/
Specifying

Tolerance

Max Value
Up to 20 limits can be set for the color difference to be used for judgment.
It is possible to enter up to 2 digits past the decimal point.
If a 3rd digit is entered, the value will round up or round down accordingly.

Using the CCS

When the CCS has been set and you perform measurement, the following screen is displayed as a list
display.

■ Closest Color Search dialog box

Among all target data, the target data which satisfies the condition specified in the Target Selection
Mode dialog box is displayed in increasing order of color difference.
Select the target data used for color difference measurement from these candidates and click the OK
button. The data will be linked to the sample data as the target data for color difference
measurement.

84
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.4.2-d Not Specify Target (Absolute measurement)

Select Classification by Target - Absolute Data in the tree of the list window.

Or, select Absolute Data from the Select Target box in the toolbar.
To add the Select Target box in the toolbar, see the procedure on page 126.

2.4.2-e Specifying Working Target Ê

This function is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.

Target Data/
Specifying
Tolerance
You can organize several pieces of target data in a group and specify all the data pieces as the target data
for color difference measurement. A group consists of several pieces of working target data under one
piece of master target data. You can perform various evaluations using the group, such as showing the
working target data and master target data simultaneously in a color difference graph or absolute graph,
or fixing the position of the origin point of the graph at the master target data.
1. From the tree in the list window, select a data group under All data - Sample(s), or select the absolute
data or target data in the Classification by Target folder. Then, select the sample or target data from
the list.
Target data that has already been specified as a master target cannot be specified as a working target.

2. Select Tool - Working Target from the menu bar.

The Working Target dialog box appears.

85
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

3. Specify the necessary items.

■ Working Target dialog box

Target Data/
Specifying

Tolerance

Working Target candidate

The name of the data selected in step 1 is displayed.

Move to Working Target

When this option is checked, the data is specified as new working target data and is deleted from the
original folder selected in step 1. When this option is not checked, the data is copied and specified as
new working target data while it remains in the original folder.
Master Target
Select the master target data to which the selected working target data belongs.

86
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.4.3 Setting the Tolerance

To perform judgement based on color difference measurement, it is necessary to set the tolerance.

2.4.3-a Setting the Initial Tolerance

The default tolerance is the value which is automatically set when the target is registered during
measurement or other operations. To always perform judgment with the same tolerance, you can specify
the tolerance in advance to save performing the tolerance setting operation every time targets are
changed.
1. Select Data - Default Tolerance Setting from the menu bar.
Unless the number of banks has already been set for the file through measurement, the Bank dialog
box appears. See page 57 for details on bank setting.
The Default Settings dialog box appears.

Target Data/
The colorimetric data items to be displayed (list items) are the items specified with the procedure in

Specifying
Tolerance
“Setting the List Items” (page 46).

2. Specify the parameters of the tolerance.

When Bank is set to 2, select SCI or SCE, or select UV100% or UV0% or select White or Black at
Group Traits and specify the tolerance respectively. When Bank is set to 3, select 25 degree,
45 degree or 75 degree, or select UV100%, UV0% or UVadj at Group Traits and specify the toler-
ance respectively.
The specified tolerance is applied to newly added target data.

87
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Default Tolerance Settings dialog box

When the check box in the Use for
Judgement column is checked, the data
is judged with the upper/lower tolerance
values. Data boxes left unchecked are
not judged.
Numerical values can be edited regard-
less of the status of the check mark.
The tolerance can be specified for each
of colorimetric data items (list items)
displayed in the list window.
Target Data/
Specifying

Tolerance

2.4.3-b Setting the Tolerance for Each Target

The tolerance specified with the default tolerance setting during the target registration can be changed
for each target data.
1. From the tree in the list window, select a data group under All data - Target(s) and then select the tar-
get data from the list.

2. Select Data - Tolerance Setting from the menu bar.

The Tolerance Setting dialog box appears.

88
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

3. Specify the necessary parameters of the tolerance.

When Bank is set to 2, select SCI or SCE, or select UV100% or UV0% or select White or Black at
Group Traits. When Bank is set to 3, select 25 degree, 45 degree or 75 degree, or select UV100%,
UV0% or UVadj at Group Traits. Then you can specify the tolerance respectively.

Target Data/
Specifying
Tolerance
■ Tolerance Settings dialog box
Target
The name of the data selected in step 1 and its L*a*b* values are displayed.
Auto Fitting Ê
When one of CMC, ΔE*94 and ΔE00 is selected in the list items and sample data exists, the optimum
tolerance is automatically adjusted based on the color difference equation.
This automatic adjustment is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.
Set Parameter
When this option is checked, the parameters are automatically adjusted based on the upper limit
specified as the tolerance.
When this option is not checked, the upper limit of the tolerance is automatically adjusted by using
the parameters that were already entered.
Apply
When this button is clicked, automatic adjustment begins and the automatically specified values are
displayed.
When “Set Parameter” is checked, the parameters are updated. When it is not checked, only the tol-
erance of the color difference equation is updated.
Adjust Ê
When sample data exists, an optimal ellipse is calculated automatically from the distribution of sam-
ple data regardless of the color difference equation. This setting can be used independently from the
tolerance setting judged with threshold values.
This automatic adjustment is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.
Use for Judgement
When this option is checked, judgement is performed based on the result of AND of this selection
and the setting in the Use for Judgement column of the Tolerance Data table.

89
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Parameter
Set the parameters for the color difference equation which requires parameter setting.
You cannot change parameters according to the illuminant. The parameters set here are always
effective. When any of the parameters are changed, all the displayed data will be calculated again.
Items marked with Ê are supported only by SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition.
List Items tab
When the check box in the Use for
Judgement column is checked, the data
is judged with the upper/lower tolerance
values. Data boxes left unchecked are
not judged.
Numerical values can be edited regard-
less of the status of the check mark.
The tolerance can be specified for each
Target Data/
Specifying

of colorimetric data items (list items)

Tolerance

displayed in the list window.

Primary/Secondary/Tertiary tabs
Items ΔL*Δ*Δb* and ΔE*ab for each
illuminant, CMC, ΔE*94 and ΔE00 can
be specified independently from the list
items.
The Primary/Secondary/Tertiary tab can
be selected only when target data exists
for the corresponding illuminant.

Group Traits:
Switches the attribute of the target data
between SCI and SCE.

Parameter:
Specify the parameters of CMC, ΔE*94
and ΔE00.

The graph reflects the Target settings

shown above.

90
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.4.3-c Specifying the Judgement Format in the List Window

1. Select Data - Judgement Format from the menu bar.
The List Format dialog box appears.

2. Select the Judgement Tab and specify the parameters of the judgement format.

Target Data/
Specifying
Tolerance
■ List Format dialog box
Judgement tab
Judgement for Each Values
The following settings are applied to the individual list items to be judged.
Pass
Text Color: Specify the color of the numerical value in the list window when the value is judged
as passed.
Background: Specify the background color of the numerical value in the list window when the
value is judged as passed.

Fail
Text Color: Specifies the color of the numerical value in the list window when the value is
judged as failed.
Background: Specifies the background color of the numerical value in the list window when the
value is judged as failed.

91
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Warning
Text Color: Specify the color of the numerical value in the list window when caution is
required.
Background: Specify the background color of the numerical value in the list window when cau-
tion is required.
Warning Level: Specify the percentage of the passing level which is to be judged as the warning
level.
Show Warning Level:
When this option is checked, the warning level is always displayed.
These settings are also applied to the pass/fail judgement color in the trend chart of the object.
Total Judgement
The following settings are applied to the judgement result following judgement of all the target items in
the list window.
Pass
Target Data/
Specifying

Label: Specifies the wording to be displayed when the result is judged as passed.
Tolerance

Text Color: Specifies the color of the string displayed in the list window when the result is
judged as passed.
Background: Specifies the background color of the string displayed in the list window when the
result is judged as passed.

Fail
Label: Specifies the wording to be displayed when the result is judged as failed.
Text Color: Specifies the color of the string displayed in the list window when the result is
judged as failed.
Background: Specifies the background color of the string displayed in the list window when the
result is judged as failed.

Warning
Label: Specify the text to be displayed as a caution message.
Text Color: Specify the color of the text in the list window when warning is required.
Background: Specify the background color of the text in the list window when caution is
required.
These settings are also applied to the pass/fail judgement color in the absolute value graph and color
difference graph of the object.
Visual Judgement
Data is judged based on the visual judgement information appended to the data.
Include Visual Judgement results into the Total Judgement.
When this option is checked, the visual judgement affects the total judgement result.

Priority on Visual Judgement

When this option is checked, the total judgement depends on the visual judgement:
• When the data passes the visual judgement, it passes the total judgement.
• When the data fails the visual judgement, it fails the total judgement even though it passes all of
the other judgements.

92
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.5 Measurement
To begin measurement, use one of the several methods available, as shown below.
Sample measurement:
Trigger the SpectraMagic NX software to take a measurement and obtain the sample data.

Sample remote measurement:

Perform measurement by pressing the measuring button of the instrument. The SpectraMagic NX
software receives the sample data.
If the CM-36dG, CM-36dGV, or CM-36d is connected, pressing the measuring button once
performs the number of measurements set for Auto Averaging (up to 10 measurements maximum).
If the CM-25cG, CM-26dG/26d/25d, CM-2600d/2500d, CM-2500c, CM-700d/600d or CM-5/CR-5
is connected, pressing the measuring button once performs measurement up to the number of auto
averagings set on the instrument. If a different instrument is connected, measurement is only per-
formed once.

Interval measurement: Ê
Start measurement by triggering the SpectraMagic NX software once to take a measurement using
the interval time and number of measurements specified in advance. The measured sample data is

Measurement
received after every measurement.
Ê This function is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.

Sample automatic averaging measurement:

Trigger the SpectraMagic NX software once to begin measurement. After the specified number of
measurements has been taken, the collected sample data is averaged to obtain one piece of sample
data.

Sample manual averaging measurement:

Select manual averaging measurement mode. Take repeated measurements for the desired number
of times and exit the mode. The sample data collected during the period is averaged to obtain one
piece of sample data.

The methods above can also be combined to obtain sample data. Note that you cannot use the interval
measurement in connection with the manual averaging measurement.

93
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.5.1 Performing Sample Measurement

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer or the chroma meter is connected and the
protection key is attached to the computer.
• Sample measurement can also be performed from the Sample Viewer dialog. See p. 67.

1. Select Instrument - Measure Sample from the menu bar.

The Name dialog box appears.
If auto-naming is activated, the Name dialog box does not appear. Skip this process and go to step 3.
To assign a comment to each piece of sample data, select Data - Data Property from the menu bar
after the measurement and type the comment in the displayed dialog box. (See page 104.)
This option cannot be selected in the Opacity/Haze mode.
Measurement

2. Enter the name of the data.

You can assign a name, supplementary data information Ê and a comment for each piece of sample
data. (See page 70.)
Select a supplementary data information item every time you measure.
Items marked with Ê are supported only by SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition.

(Sample display of the Professional Edition)

94
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

3. Click the OK button.

When the opacity/haze measurement mode is set, measurements using a white background and a
black background are conducted in succession.
Data is added to the graphic object in the list and canvas windows.

For details of the graphic object, see “Graphic Object Properties” on page 213.
You can print measurement results with a serial printer after every measurement. See “Serial Printing”
on page 130.

2.5.2 Performing Sample Remote Measurement

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer, excluding the CM-3000 Series, or the
chroma meter is connected and the protection key is attached to the computer.

Measurement
1. Select Instrument - Remote Measurement - Sample Remote Measurement from the menu bar.
Checking this option enables remote measurement of sample data. When this option is selected, the
measurement can be triggered either with the measuring button of the instrument or with the mea-
suring command of the SpectraMagic NX software.
This option cannot be selected in the Opacity/Haze mode.

■ Target Remote Measurement and Sample Remote Measurement

Target Remote Measurement and Sample Remote Measurement cannot be selected simultaneously. If
you select Sample Remote Measurement while Target Remote Measurement is checked, the check mark
for Target Remote Measurement is deselected and a check mark appears for Sample Remote Measure-
ment. If you select Sample Remote Measurement again, the check mark is deleted and Sample Remote
Measurement is deselected.

95
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

When the CM-5 is connected

If Specular Component is set to SCI+SCE in Instrument settings, Sample Remote Measurement cannot
be performed.

When the CM-700d/600d is connected

By setting options in advance, the results of the measurement or pass/fail judgment for the "target
remote measurement" and "sample remote measurement" can be displayed on the LCD screen of the
instrument. For the procedure of the advance setting, refer to page 196.

When a CM-2600-, CM-512m3A, or CR-400-Series instrument is connected

If the instrument's Communication Mode is canceled and then set again using instrument controls, Sam-
ple Remote Measurement will be canceled on the instrument. When this occurs, uncheck Sample
Remote Measurement and then check it again to re-enable Sample Remote Measurement.

When a CM-26dG/26d with firmware earlier than ver. 1.2 is connected

If UV Settings in Instrument Settings is set to 100% Full + 400nm cut or 100% Full + 400nm cut + UV
Measurement

Adjust, Remote Measurement cannot be performed.

2.5.3 Performing Interval Measurement Ê

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer or the chroma meter is connected and the
protection key is attached to the computer.
This function is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.
1. Select Instrument - Measurement Options from the menu bar.
The Measurement Mode dialog box appears.
Check Interval Measurement and specify the options for the interval measurement.

96
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

The interval measurement repeats measurement a specified number of times at specified intervals.
The measured sample data is received after every measurement.

■ Measurement Mode dialog box

See “Measurement Mode dialog box” on page 63.
2. Click the OK button.

Measurement
3. Perform the measurement described on page 94.
The Measurement dialog box appears and interval measurement is performed.
During interval measurement, data is added to the list window after every measurement.

97
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.5.4 Performing Sample Automatic Averaging Measurement

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer or the chroma meter is connected and the
protection key is attached to the computer.
1. Select Instrument - Measurement Options from the menu bar.
The Measurement Mode dialog box appears. Check “Enable Averaging” to enable automatic aver-
aging measurement of sample data.
Measurement

During automatic averaging measurement of sample data, measurements are repeated the specified
number of times. When the measurement is completed, the collected sample data is averaged to
obtain one piece of sample data.

■ Measurement Mode dialog box

See “Measurement Mode dialog box” on page 63.

98
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.5.5 Performing Sample Manual Averaging Measurement

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer or the chroma meter is connected and the
protection key is attached to the computer.
1. Select Instrument - Averaged Measurement - Sample Averaged Measurement from the menu bar.
The Sample Averaged Measurement dialog box appears.

When the CM-36dG, CM-36dGV, or CM-36d is connected,

clicking Show Sample Viewer will open the Sample Viewer panel
(indicated by red dotted-line rectangle above) showing a real-time

Measurement
view of the measurement subject from inside the instrument to
help in accurately positioning the subject. Clicking Hide Sample
Viewer will hide the Sample Viewer panel.

2. Click the Measure button repeatedly to perform measurement the desired number of times.
When the opacity/haze measurement mode is set, measurements using a white background and a
black background are conducted.
The sample data is displayed in the dialog box.
The average and standard deviation are calculated and displayed for each measurement. The data
with the check mark is used for the calculation of the average. Uncheck any data that you do not
want to include in the average calculation, such as abnormal values.

3. Click the End button.

The average is added to the list window and to the graphic object in the canvas window as one piece
of sample data.
The averaging calculation performed here first averages spectral reflectance or XYZ data to obtain
data that is then used in the calculation of colorimetric data. On the other hand, the averaging calcu-
lation that uses the statistical values described on pages 110 and 111 averages the colorimetric data
of each piece of data that was calculated individually according to its spectral reflectance or XYZ
data. Consequently, the results of these two types of calculations may differ.

99
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Sample Averaged Measurement dialog box

Color space drop-down List box
Select L*a*b*, XYZ, L*c*h, Hunter Lab, Yxy, L*u*v* or L*u'v' as the color space to display in the
list.

When the CM-36dG, CM-36dGV, or CM-36d is

connected, the Sample Viewer panel (indicated by red
dotted-line rectangle above) will be shown when Show
Measurement

Sample Viewer has been clicked.

Retrieve checked data besides averaged result

When this option is checked, the data with a check mark is added to the list window and to the
graphic object in the canvas window as an individual piece of sample data.

Option
Clicking this button displays a dialog box used for specifying options for the averaging measure-
ment.

Show Sample Viewer/Hide Sample Viewer

(Shown only when CM-36dG, CM-36dGV, or CM-36d is connected)
Shows/hides the Sample Viewer panel.

Copy Image (in Sample Viewer panel)

Copies the sample viewer image to the Windows clipboard.

Select All
All the sample data will be checked and selected.

Unselect All
All the sample data will be unchecked.

100
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Average Measurements: Options dialog box

• Any changes to settings in this dialog box will not take effect for this measurement. They will take
effect the next time the Target Averaged Measurement or Sample Averaged Measurement dialog
box is opened.

Inspection
Automatically end measurements when standard deviation is within value below
When this option is checked, the measurement is terminated automatically when the standard devia-

Measurement
tion becomes lower than the threshold value.
The input range is between 0.001 and 1.
When Eliminate outliers has been specified, the standard deviation is determined after the Eliminate
outliers operation.

Eliminate outliers
Eliminate maximum and minimum values
When this option is checked, the maximum and minimum values are monitored during the manual
averaging measurement, and the averaging sample data is determined after the maximum and mini-
mum values are deleted from the result of the averaging measurement.
When this option is specified, the manual averaging measurement finishes only after the measure-
ment is repeated at least three times. The data of the maximum and minimum values are displayed in
red, and they cannot be checked.

SMC (Disabled if connected instrument is CR-5 or CR-400/410)

When this is checked, statistical measurement control will be performed and the measurement
sequence will automatically end when the σΔE*ab equivalent for the specified Number of valid data
is equal to or less than the specified Standard deviation value.
• If the maximum of the specified Number of valid data + 4 measurements have been taken with-
out meeting the specified Number of valid data and Standard deviation, an error message will
appear and the measurement sequence will end without adding measurement data to the docu-
ment.

Comment input dialog display

Specify whether to display the comment input screen before or after the measurement.

101
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.5.6 Uploading the Sample Data from the Instrument

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer, excluding the CM-36dG Series or
CM-3000 Series, or the chroma meter is connected and the protection key is attached to the computer.
The sample data stored in the memory of the instrument can be uploaded to the SpectraMagic NX soft-
ware. If any target data is linked to the sample data to be uploaded, this target data is also uploaded.
To refer to the measurement numbers set by the instrument at the time of measurement, be sure that
“Data number” from the Instrument group is included as one of the Selected Items in the List Items dia-
log box. (See page 46.)
1. Select Instrument - Upload/Download - Upload Samples from the menu bar.
If the CM-26dG/26d/25d, CM-2600d/2500d or CM-700d/600d is connected and if the number of banks has not
been set for the file through measurement, the Bank dialog box appears. See page 57 for details on bank setting.
Measurement

If the CM-2600d/2500d or CM-2500c is connected, the Upload Setting dialog box appears.
If the ROM version of the CM-2600d/2500d is Ver. 1.21, Language Environment of Instrument is
also displayed.
Specify the display language to be used for the instrument and the parameters of the data uploading
operation. Click the OK button.

Sample display when the

CM-2600d/2500d is connected

102
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2. Uploading starts.
When the uploading is completed, the Sample Data to upload dialog box appears. Data with a check
mark will be uploaded. Uncheck any unnecessary data.
If the CM-26dG/26d/25d is connected and the number of banks is set to 2, select the desired BankID
("SCIE" for Group Traits: SCI/SCE or "OPACITY" for Group Traits: White/Black) from the
BankID pull-down list.
Note that the data cannot be checked when:
• The target data linked with the sample data is colorimetric data and the illuminant and observer
settings are different from those currently specified with the SpectraMagic NX software.
• The connected instrument is the CR-5 and the illuminant and observer settings are different from
those currently specified with the SpectraMagic NX software.
• The number of banks or group traits setting is different from the settings currently set in the file.
• The connected instrument is the CM-26dG/26d/25d, CM-2600d/2500d, or CM-700d/600d and
the number of banks or group traits (CM-26dG/26d/25d only) setting for the data to be uploaded
is different to the setting for linked target data.
• The connected instrument is the CM-25cG or CM-26dG and the measurement mode for the sam-
ple data or the linked target is “Gloss only”.

Measurement
Sample display when
the CM-2600d/2500d
is connected
3. When the OK button is clicked, the data is added to the list window and to the graphic object in the
canvas window.

■ Upload Setting dialog box (only when the CM-2600d/2500d or CM-2500c is

connected)
Condition
The data corresponding to the checked items will be retrieved.

103
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Language display of instrument

Instruments with ROM version 1.21 offer a selectable display language.

■ Sample Data to upload dialog box (only when the CM-2600d/2500d,

Measurement

CM-2500c, CM-25cG, CM-26dG/26d/25d, CM-700d/600d or CM-5/CR-5 is

connected)
BankID (CM-26dG/26d/25d only):Select the desired BankID ("SCIE" for Group Traits: SCI/SCE
or "OPACITY" for Group Traits: White/Black).
Select All: All of the sample data will be checked and selected.
Unselect All: All of the sample data will be unchecked.

Sample display when

the CM-2600d/2500d
is connected

2.5.7 Displaying Data Properties

You can display the properties of the data selected in the list window.
1. Select data in the list window.
To select the data to be listed, see page 113. To select the target data, select All Data - Target(s) from
the tree and choose the data in the displayed data group.

104
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2. Select Data - Data Property in the menu bar.

The Data Property dialog box appears.

Measurement
In addition to using the menu bar, you can select Data Property by right-clicking the data in the list win-
dow and selecting the command from the displayed context menu. You can also display the Data Prop-
erty dialog box by double-clicking on data in the list window. When two or more pieces of data have
been selected in the list window, you can navigate among the selected pieces of data one by one with the
Previous and Next buttons.
3. Specify the data properties as required.

■ Data Property dialog box

The following properties can be edited or changed.

Items marked with Ê are supported only by SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition.

105
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Data tab
• Name
• Item (of supplementary data information) Ê
• Comment
Color tab Ê
• Visual Judgement
• PseudoColor
For details of these parameters, refer to page 106.
Image tab
• Image file
• Image position marker
• Marker color
For details of these parameters, refer to page 107.

2.5.8 Using the Visual Judgement of Data Ê

This function is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.
1. Select Visual Judgement on the Color tab of the Data Property dialog box.
Measurement

Select one of None, OK, NG and Warning.

You can set the function so that the specified visual judgement result affects the total judgement.
Refer to page 91 for the setting procedure.

106
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.5.9 Linking an Image to Data

1. Click the Browse button in the Image tab of the Data Property dialog box. In the dialog box for
selecting a file to be opened, select the image file directly.
The selected image file is displayed. You can select a file in either JPEG or BMP file format. Note
that the SpectraMagic NX software does not store the image file itself but only remembers the path
to the file. Do not change the filename or the directory of the image file with Internet Explorer or
other software.

Browse button

Measurement
Setting a position marker
Double-click the point where you want to set a marker in the image. A marker appears at that point.
Only one marker can be set per image. If you try to set a second marker at a different point, the marker
will move to that point. Note that the SpectraMagic NX software does not actually draw a marker in the
image file but only remembers the position of the marker.

Position marker

■ Data Property dialog box

Remove
The specified image setting is canceled.
Remove marker
The marker is removed from the image.
Color
The color of the marker can be changed.
To specify a color, see page 155.

107
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.6 List Window Operation

The list window lists sample data. You can show or hide the list window by selecting View - List Win-
dow from the menu bar.

Tree List

2.6.1 Tree
The tree in the list window includes the following items.
Document filename
All data
Target(s)
Sample(s)
List Window
Operation

Classification by Target
Absolute data: Data count
Master target 1: Data count
Working target A
Working target B
Master target 2: Data count
Master target 3: Data count
Working target C
Search
Search Cond 1: Data count
Search Cond 2: Data count

The Classification by Target folder contains the data groups that have been classified by target data and
a data group that is not linked to any target data (i.e. absolute value sample data). When target data is
registered, a new “Target” data group is created. When a document file is created, an “Absolute data”
data group is created.
In the Search folder, a data group which satisfies the condition specified in the Search dialog box is
displayed.

108
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.6.2 List
The list command lists the data included in the data group selected in the tree. Each item is displayed
according to the list items specified on page 46.
The items x, y, u', v', Δx, Δy, Δu' and Δv' are expressed to four decimal places. Other colorimetric data is
expressed to two decimal places.
The number of decimal places can be changed. See page 62 for details.
The SpectraMagic NX software enhances calculation accuracy by performing internal calculations with
numbers more precise than those actually displayed. Consequently, the least significant digit displayed
may differ from that of the instrument by one digit due to rounding or color space conversion.
For example, when the specular component treatment is specified as SCI + SCE, a piece of data is
displayed on two lines. When the CM-512m3A is connected, a piece of data is displayed on three lines.
The list command thus lists data by automatically adjusting the number of lines according to the
conditions and instrument.
The content of the list window and the function of the graphic objects in the canvas window vary
depending on the data group selected, as follows:

■ All Data - Target(s)

All target data existing in the document file is listed.

List Window
Operation
Functions of graphic objects
Absolute value graph, The distribution of all data in the list is displayed.
xy chromaticity diagram
Color difference graph The selected data (the last piece of data in the list when two or more
pieces of data are selected) is displayed.
Spectral graph The selected data (the first piece of data in the list when two or more
pieces of data are selected) is displayed (without difference indication).
Trend chart/histogram All data in the list is displayed.
Image The image of the selected data (the first piece of data in the list when two
or more pieces of data are selected) is displayed.
Numerical object with The numerical value of the selected data (the first piece of data in the list
target display attribute when two or more pieces of data are selected) is displayed.
Numerical object with Not displayed.
sample display attribute

109
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ All Data - Sample(s)

All sample data existing in the document file is listed.

Functions of graphic objects

Absolute value graph, The distribution of all data in the list is displayed.
xy chromaticity diagram
Color difference graph Not displayed.
Spectral graph The selected data is displayed (without difference indication).
Trend chart/histogram All data in the list is displayed.
Image The image of the selected data (the first piece of data in the list
when two or more pieces of data are selected) is displayed.
Numerical object with target Not displayed.
display attribute
Numerical object with sample The numerical value of the selected data (the first piece of data in
display attribute the list when two or more pieces of data are selected) is displayed.

■ Classification by Target - Absolute data

List Window
Operation

Of all sample data existing in the document file, only the sample data not linked to any target data
(i.e. absolute value sample data) is listed.

Statistics

Statistical value
The statistics of the absolute data are displayed. The statistics are displayed when List - Categorized
List - Show Statistics is checked in the Data List tab of the Display Settings dialog box. To view this
dialog box, select Tool - View Settings from the menu bar. The display can be set to on or off per item
such as Max., Min. The list of statistics cannot be scrolled.

The averaging calculation performed here averages the colorimetric data of each piece of data that
was calculated individually according to its spectral reflectance or XYZ data.
On the other hand, the manual averaging measurement (described on page 99) and the averaging of
list data (on page 116) first average spectral reflectance or XYZ data to obtain data that is then used
in the calculation of colorimetric data. For this reason, the results of these two types of calculations
may differ.

110
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Functions of graphic objects

Absolute value graph, The distribution of all data in the list is displayed.
xy chromaticity diagram
Color difference graph Not displayed.
Spectral graph The selected data is displayed (without difference indication).
Trend chart/histogram All data in the list is displayed.
Image The image of the selected data (the first piece of data in the list
when two or more pieces of data are selected) is displayed.
Numerical object with target Not displayed.
display attribute
Numerical object with sample The numerical value of the selected data (the first piece of data in
display attribute the list when two or more pieces of data are selected) is displayed.

■ Classification by Target - Target **

Of all sample data existing in the document file, only the sample data linked to the specified target
data is listed.

Linked Target

Statistics

List Window
Operation
Linked target data
The linked target data is displayed when List - Categorized List - Show Linked Target is checked in
the Data List tab of the Display Settings dialog box. To show this dialog box, select Tool - View Set-
tings from the menu bar. The lines of the linked target data cannot be scrolled.
Statistical value
The statistical values of the sample data linked with the target data are displayed.
The statistics are displayed when List - Categorized List - Show Statistics is checked in the Data List
tab of the Display Settings dialog box. To show this dialog box, select Tool - View Settings from the
menu bar. The display can be set to on or off per item such as Max., Min. The lines of the statistics
cannot be scrolled.

The averaging calculation performed here averages the colorimetric data of each piece of data that
was calculated individually according to its spectral reflectance or XYZ data.
On the other hand, the manual averaging measurement (described on page 99) and the averaging of
list data (on page 116) first average spectral reflectance or XYZ data to obtain data that is then used
in the calculation of colorimetric data. For this reason, the results of these two types of calculations
may differ.

111
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Functions of graphic objects

Absolute value graph, The distribution of all data in the list is displayed.
xy chromaticity diagram
Color difference graph The distribution of all data in the list is displayed. (In ΔL*a*b*
graph, contrast hue locus and contrast chroma locus are displayed.)
Spectral graph The target data and selected data are displayed (with difference indi-
cation).
Trend chart/histogram All data in the list is displayed (reference line display).
Image The image of the selected data (the first piece of data in the list
when two or more pieces of data are selected) is displayed.
Numerical object with target The target data is displayed.
display attribute
Numerical object with sample The numerical value of the selected data (the first data in the list
display attribute when two or more pieces of data are selected) is displayed.
List Window
Operation

112
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.6.3 Editing the List Data

■ Selecting the list data
When the mouse pointer is positioned over the leftmost column (number column) in the list, the shape
of the pointer changes into an arrow. Click the list data with this arrow to select the data. To select two
or more pieces of data, click the first piece of data and specify the range by clicking the last piece of
data while holding down the Shift key, or click the desired pieces of data one by one while holding
down the Ctrl key. You can also select a range by dragging the mouse. To select noncontiguous pieces
of data, hold down both the Shift and Ctrl keys. Data in different folders cannot be selected.

■ Copying the list data

Right-click the selected (highlighted) data and select Copy from the displayed context menu. Or, select
the data and then select Edit - Copy from the menu bar. The copied data can be pasted into spreadsheet
software such as Excel.

List Window
Operation

■ Cutting the list data

In the list of data displayed by selecting All Data - Target(s) or All Data - Sample(s), right-click the
selected (highlighted) data and select Cut from the displayed context menu. Or, select the data and then
click Edit - Cut from the menu bar.
The cut data is shown in a dotted line on the list. If the data is pasted to somewhere, the previously cut
data is deleted from the list.
The cut data can be pasted into spreadsheet software such as Excel.

■ Pasting the list data

Click in the location where you want to paste the data. Right-click on this location and select Paste from
the displayed context menu. Or, select Edit - Paste from the menu bar. You can paste data only if you
have copied data beforehand. Data cannot be pasted into the same document file from which the data
was copied.

113
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Simultaneous copy-and-paste of the list data

The list data can also be copied or moved by drag-and-drop operation. To drag data, select the data and
move the mouse pointer to the boundary of the selected data. When the shape of the pointer changes
into a square, drag the data and drop it at the desired point to move the data. If you drag-and-drop data
while holding down the Ctrl key, the data is copied and pasted.
If you move sample data from a data group classified by target into another data group classified by
target, the linkage between the sample data and the target data changes.

■ Deleting the list data

Right-click the selected (highlighted) data and select Delete from the displayed context menu. Or, select
the data and select Edit - Delete from the menu bar. If more than one piece of data is selected, all the
selected data will be deleted simultaneously. When target data is deleted, the sample data linked to the
target data loses its attribute and becomes absolute data.

■ Sorting the list data

The list data can be sorted according to a list item. For example, data can be arranged in ascending order
according to the ΔE*ab value. Right-click inside the list and select Sort from the displayed context
menu. Or, select Tool - Sort from the menu bar. The data to be sorted is the list data in the list. When
Sort is selected, the Sort dialog box appears.
If the list data has two or more banks of data, the data specified in Group Traits is used as the sort key.
List Window
Operation

Copying, cutting, and pasting cannot be executed after the list data has been sorted.
To perform copying, cutting, and pasting, clear the settings in the Sort dialog box.

■ Saving the list data in text format

Right-click the selected (highlighted) data and select Save Selection as Text from the displayed context
menu. Or, select the data and select File - Save Selection As Text from the menu bar. The data is saved as
a tab-delimited text in a text file with the extension “.txt” or as a file using a delimiter specified in the
Control Panel (extension: csv).

■ Saving the list data in XML format

Right-click the selected (highlighted) data and select Save List Items As XML from the displayed con-
text menu. Or, select the data and select File - Save List Items As XML from the menu bar.
The data is saved as an XML file with the extension “.xml”.

114
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.6.4 Changing the Linkage with Target Data

Any and all pieces of sample data can be linked to any target data. The linkage can be changed any time.
1. Right-click the selected (highlighted) list data and select Tool - Change Target from the displayed
context menu. Or, select the desired list data and select Tool - Change Target from the menu bar.
When the command is selected, the Target Linkage dialog box appears.

2. Specify the linkage to target data.

List Window
Operation
■ Target Linkage dialog box

Target Linkage Setting

Link to Specified Target
Click the ▼ button in the Number text box and select the target from the displayed window. The
selected target is specified as the target data to be used for color difference measurement.

Don't Link to Target

The selected data loses its linkage to any target data. The data becomes absolute data.
You can also change the linkage to target data by moving the list data (by means of drag-and-drop). For
details, see page 113.

115
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.6.5 Adding Averaged Data

You can select the desired data from the list data, obtain the average and add the result as new data.
1. Right-click the selected (highlighted) list data and select Tool - Average from the displayed context
menu. Or, select at least one piece of list data and select Tool - Average from the menu bar.
A dialog box with the following message appears: “Are you sure to add averaged data?”

2. Click the Yes button.

The averaged data is added to the list.
List Window
Operation

The averaging calculation performed here first averages spectral reflectance or XYZ data to obtain
data that is then used in the calculation of colorimetric data. On the other hand, the averaging calcu-
lation that uses the statistical values described on pages 110 and 111 averages the colorimetric data
of each piece of data that was calculated individually according to its spectral reflectance or XYZ
data. Consequently, the results of these two types of calculations may differ.

116
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.6.6 Searching for data

You can search the list of data for the data which satisfies the specified condition and display the data.
Note, if document files are created using SpectraMagic NX version 2.03 or prior versions, depending on
the instruments and settings, you may not be able to search the list.
1. Select Edit - Search from the menu bar.
Instead of using the menu bar, you can select Search in the context menu which is displayed by
right-clicking the tree display in the list window.

2. Specify the options for the search and click the Search button.
The name of the specified search condition appears in the tree display in the list window, and the
data which satisfies the search condition is displayed in the list display.

List Window
Operation
■ Search dialog box

Scope
Search Scope
Select a data group to be used for the search.

Group
You can set specific group traits as a search scope depending on the bank setting of the document
file.
For example, when Bank is set to 1, you can select from SCI/E, SCI and SCE.
When group traits for the number of banks of 2 or 3 are selected, data which satisfies the condition
of any of the group traits is displayed in the list.

117
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Condition
Specify the condition of the search for the specified list item.
Two search conditions can be set which can be related by AND/OR condition.

Name
Name the specified search condition. This name will be displayed in the tree display in the list
window.

About search

■ Editing the search condition

When you right-click the search condition in the tree display and select Edit from the displayed
context menu, the Search dialog box appears. In this dialog box, you can edit the current search
settings.

■ Refreshing the search result

List Window
Operation

When you right-click the search condition in the tree display and select Refresh from the displayed
context menu, the search is repeated based on the search condition. If you add new data after setting
the search condition, you can repeat the search including the new data.
Note that when you change the observer/illuminant and then select Refresh, the search result may be
different from the previous result.

■ Deleting the search condition

When you right-click the search condition in the tree display and select Delete from the displayed
context menu, or when you select the search condition in the tree display and then select Edit -
Delete from the menu bar, the search condition is deleted.
The data in the list display disappears, however, the data itself remains in the document file.

118
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.6.7 Enlarging/Reducing the List Size

Right-click inside the list to display the context menu or select View in the menu bar. Select an appropri-
ate command.

■ Enlarging the list size

1. Select Zoom In List.
The size of the list is enlarged.

List Window
Operation
■ Reducing the list size
1. Select Zoom Out List.
The size of the list is reduced.

■ Restoring the list size

1. Select Restore List Size.
The size of the list is reset to the default size.
The default size can be changed. Refer to page 152 for the procedure to change the default size.

119
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.7 Canvas Window Operation

The canvas window displays data as graphs. The SpectraMagic NX software provides various types of
graphs that can be placed in the window as desired. The canvas window is available in two types of
views: Display view and Printing view. The views can be added up to a combined total of 10 views. Use
display view to place graphic objects in order to check the measurement results on the PC display. Use
printing view to place graphic objects in order to print out a test report.
See page 213 for details of the graphic objects.

2.7.1 Editing the Canvas Window

Graphs, charts and their components are called graphic objects.
To edit graphic objects, set the canvas window to edit mode.
1. Select Tool - View Settings from the menu bar.
The Display Settings dialog box appears.

2. Select the General tab.

Operation

3. Check “Allow editing canvas window” and click the OK button.

Window
Canvas

4. Check Tool - Edit Mode in the menu bar.

The canvas window enters graphic object edit mode.

See pages 152 and 153 for the details of other setting items in the Display Settings dialog box.

120
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.7.2 Pasting a Graphic Object

1. Select a graphic object.
Select a graphic object to paste into the tool bar or select it from the Object menu in the menu bar.
When a graphic object is selected, the mouse pointer changes shape.

Operation
2. Paste the graphic object.

Window
Canvas
Drag the graphic object over the canvas window and paste it in the desired location. A frame with
handles appears around the graphic object. Drag the appropriate handle to change the size of the
object as desired.
Unless the number of banks has already been set for the file through measurement, the Bank dialog
box appears. See page 57 for details on bank setting.

Handle

2.7.3 Editing the Graphic Object

■ Selecting a Graphic Object
When you click the inside of the frame of a graphic object that has been pasted in the canvas window,
the graphic object is selected. You can select two or more objects by selecting them while holding down
the Shift key.
When you drag the mouse pointer to enclose a graphic object, the object is also selected. (You can select
an object by enclosing either all or part of it.) If you enclose two or more graphic objects, all the graphic
objects involved are selected.
Even if several document files are opened, you cannot select graphic objects in more than one document
file.

121
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Deselecting a Graphic Object

Click inside any area other than that of the pasted graphic objects or click the ESC key. When two or
more graphic objects are selected, clicking an object while holding down the Shift key deselects only
that object.

■ Changing the Size of a Graphic Object

Click and select a graphic object and move the mouse pointer over one of the handles on the frame.
When the shape of the pointer changes into a double-headed arrow, drag the handle and change the size
of the object.

With a rectangular object, dragging the handle at the upper right corner rounds the corners, converting
the shape from a rectangle to an ellipse.
Operation
Window
Canvas

■ Moving a Graphic Object

Click and select a graphic object and move the mouse pointer to any point inside the frame. Drag the
object to the desired location.

122
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Copying a Graphic Object

Click and select a graphic object. Right-click the object and select Copy from the displayed context
menu. You can also copy it by selecting Edit - Copy from the menu bar or by pressing the C key while
holding down the Ctrl key. When you drag an object while holding down the Ctrl key, a copy of the
object is dragged and pasted. When two or more objects are selected, all the selected objects are copied
simultaneously.

■ Cutting out a Graphic Object

Click and select a graphic object. Right-click the object and select Cut from the displayed context menu.
You can also cut the object by selecting Edit - Cut from the menu bar or by pressing the X key while
holding down the Ctrl key. When two or more objects are selected, all the selected objects are cut simul-
taneously.

■ Pasting a Graphic Object

Right-click an object and select Paste from the displayed context menu. You can also paste it by select-
ing Edit - Paste from the menu bar or by pressing the V key while holding down the Ctrl key. When two
or more document files are open, you can copy an object from one open document and paste it in the
canvas window of another document file.

■ Aligning Graphic Objects

When two or more graphic objects are selected, the handle for the object selected first is displayed in
light blue, and the handle for the object selected second or later is displayed in green. Under such condi-
tions, you can select one of the alignment menus by selecting Object - Align from the menu bar to align
the graphic objects on the screen by using the first-selected object as a reference.

■ Deleting a Graphic Object

Click and select a graphic object. Select Edit - Delete from the menu bar or press the Delete key. When

Operation
two or more objects are selected, all the selected objects are deleted simultaneously.

Window
Canvas
2.7.4 Adding a New View/Deleting a View Ê
This function is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.
You can add up to 10 views on which graphic objects can be pasted. You can create customized views
for different purposes by placing graphic objects according to the purpose of each view.
Views can be changed by clicking the tab.

■ Adding a new view

1. Right-click the tab at the bottom of the canvas window to display a pop-up menu, and then select
New from the menu.
The Canvas View Setting dialog box appears.
If 10 views already exist, you cannot select New.

123
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2. Specify the items of the canvas view setting.

■ Canvas View Setting dialog box

Canvas View Setting items
Canvas View Name
Type the name of the view in the text box. Up to 20 alphanumeric characters can be used. The spec-
ified view name is shown on the tab at the bottom of the canvas window.

View Type
Select either Display View or Printing View.

■ Deleting a view
1. Right-click the tab at the bottom of the canvas window to display a pop-up menu, and then select
Delete from the menu.
Operation
Window
Canvas

If any graphic objects are placed on the view, the message “To permanently delete the Graphic
Object, press OK” appears. Click the OK button.

The specified view is deleted.

Both the last display view and printing view cannot be deleted. A document file must include one
display view and one printing view.

■ Changing the name/type of view

1. Right-click the tab at the bottom of the canvas window to display a pop-up menu, and then select
Setting from the menu.
The Canvas View Setting dialog box appears.

124
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2. Change the items specified in the initial view settings.

2.7.5 Run Mode of the Canvas Window

When Tool - Edit Mode in the menu bar is not checked, the canvas window is in run mode.
In run mode, you cannot change the size or position of graphic objects or paste a new graphic object.
These operations are available only in edit mode. The following operations are available in run mode:
• When you double-click a graphic object, you can view the properties of that object.
• When you right-click a graphic object and select Copy from the displayed context menu (or select
Edit - Copy from the menu bar), the object is copied to the clipboard in bitmap form. This data can
be pasted into an a software program such as Microsoft Excel.
Note: You cannot paste a graphic object copied in run mode into the canvas window of the Spectra-
Magic NX software. To copy and paste graphic objects into the canvas window, set the win-
dow to edit mode.

Operation
Window
Canvas

125
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.7.6 Window Operation when the List Window is Hidden

Select the data to display in the canvas window in the following procedure.

Preparation
Before you can select the data, you must first add the necessary buttons to the toolbar.
1. Select View - Toolbar setup from the menu bar.
The Customize dialog appears.
2. Select the Command tab and select Data from the list below Categories.
3. From the Buttons area, drag and drop the Select Target box, the Previous Data button ▲ and the
Next Data button▼ to the toolbar.
The buttons appear in the toolbar.
Operation
Window
Canvas

Selecting data
1. In the Select Target box, select the data group you want to view.
2. Navigate through the data by clicking the ▲ or ▼ buttons in the toolbar or by selecting Data - Next
Data or Previous Data from the menu bar.

126
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.8 Printing
You can print the display view and printing view of the canvas window or the list in the list window.
The serial printer with guaranteed operation is DPU-H245AP-A03A. Use it in Mode B.

2.8.1 Page Setup

1. Select File - Page Setup from the menu bar.
The Page Setup dialog box appears.

2. Specify the necessary settings in the Print tab.

Printing

127
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Page Setup dialog box

Print items
Header
Specify whether to include a header in the printed document. To print a header, enter the string to be
printed as a header.
Data List
When this option is checked, the list data displayed in the list windows is printed. When this option
is unchecked, the contents of the currently selected canvas window are printed.
Print only selection data
Select this option to print the selected data only.
Footer
Specify whether to include a footer in the printed document. To print a footer, enter the string to be
printed as a footer.
You can specify whether the text to be printed as a header or footer is determined automatically dur-
ing printing.
The characters in the table below are recognized as special symbols and are replaced with corre-
sponding character strings.
String Corresponding data
$D Day of measurement
$M Month of measurement
$Y Year of measurement
$h Hour of measurement
$m Minute of measurement
$s Second of measurement
$OBS Observer specified to SpectraMagic NX for printing
$ILL1 Primary illuminant specified to SpectraMagic NX for printing
$ILL2 Secondary illuminant specified to SpectraMagic NX for printing
$ILL3 Tertiary illuminant specified to SpectraMagic NX for printing
$FNAME Name of an active file of SpectraMagic NX for printing
Printing

Enter a combination of these characters in the text box. Up to 60 alphanumeric characters can be
used.
Margin
When printing the list window, specify the Top/Bottom and Right/Left margins. The Right/Left mar-
gins can be specified within the range of 0 to 50 (mm), and the Top/Bottom margins can be specified
within the range of 5 to 50 (mm). The margin setting determines the position of the margin line dis-
played in the canvas window (see page 17). Use the line as a guide when placing graphic objects.
Direction
Portrait: Windows are printed in portrait orientation.
Landscape: Windows are printed in landscape orientation.

128
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.8.2 Print Preview

1. Select File - Print Preview from the menu bar.
A preview window appears showing the actual appearance of the page to be printed as specified in
the Page Setup dialog box.

2.8.3 Start Printing

1. Select File - Print from the menu bar.
The Print dialog box appears.

Printing

129
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.8.4 Serial Printing

You can connect a serial printer and print data after every measurement.
1. Select File - Serial Printer - Serial Printer Setting from the menu bar.
The Setting Serial Printer dialog box appears.

2. Specify the necessary items.

Printing

130
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Setting Serial Printer dialog box

Header
Header
Specify whether to print a header. To print a header, specify the character string to be printed as a
header.
Setting Print Out
Port
Select a port to connect a serial printer from the combo box.

Print Out button

When this button is clicked, the sample currently selected or the target data is printed.

Print Out after Measurement

When this option is checked, the data is output to the serial printer after every measurement.
Target Print Out Item
Target Print Out
Specify whether to print target data.
When this option is checked, you can select the item to be printed.
Sample Print Out Item
Select the item to be printed from the list.
Footer
Footer
Specify whether to print a footer. To print a footer, specify the character string to be printed as a
footer.

You can specify that the text to be printed as a header or footer is determined automatically during
printing.
The characters in the table below are recognized as special symbols and are replaced with corre-
sponding character strings.

Printing
String Corresponding data
$N Number specified in the edit box on the right
$D Day of measurement
$M Month of measurement
$Y Year of measurement
$h Hour of measurement
$m Minute of measurement
$s Second of measurement
Enter a combination of these characters in the text box. Up to 27 alphanumeric characters can be
used.

131
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.9 Saving Data

2.9.1 Saving a Data File
The content displayed in the list window or canvas window is saved as a document file.
1. Select File - Save As from the menu bar.
The Save As dialog box appears.

2. Specify the filename and other items and save the data.
The data is saved as a data file in the original file format of the SpectraMagic NX software (with the
“.mes” file extension).

The data file contains the following data:

• Sample data
• Target data
• Observer, illuminant
• Initial tolerances
• Judgement display setting
• List items specified in the list window
• Graphic objects pasted in the canvas window and their size and position information
• View setting parameters
Saving
Data

132
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10 Other Functions

2.10.1 Template File
The SpectraMagic NX software provides template files in its original file format (with the “.met” file
extension). A template file contains the following data:
• Observer, illuminant
• Initial tolerances
• Judgement display setting
• List items specified in the list window
• Graphic objects pasted in the canvas window as well as their size and position information
• Screen properties
Once you have saved the template files with the procedure described below, you can simply open the
template file with the SpectraMagic NX software and it will open consistently in the same view.
1. Select File - Template - Save as Template from the menu bar.
The Save As dialog box appears.

2. Select “Template” as the location to save to, type a filename in the Filename box and click the Save
button.
The file is saved as a template file in the SpectraMagic NX software's proprietary file format (with the
“.mtp” file extension).
The saved template file is displayed on the Template Window only after SpectraMagic NX is restarted.
The SpectraMagic NX software includes the following template files as standard:
Simple:
Opens a window in simple view as specified in the “Welcome to SpectraMagic NX” dialog box.
Functions

This view is suitable for beginners using QC operations involving color measurement such as
Other

displaying data in the color coordinate system.

Standard:
Opens a window in standard view as specified in the “Welcome to SpectraMagic NX” dialog box.
This view is suitable for standard QC operations such as color difference judgement or displaying a
trend chart.
Detail:
Opens a window in detailed view as specified in the “Welcome to SpectraMagic NX” dialog box.
This view allows for data analysis such as spectral data display and statistical calculation. This view
is suitable for an R&D environment.
133
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

SCISCE:
This view is suitable for measurement with specular component SCI+SCE. This display view is not
displayed in the “Welcome to SpectraMagic NX” dialog box.
In addition to above, templates specifically designed for each instrument are included.

■ Directory structure of the SpectraMagic NX software

The SpectraMagic NX software is installed in a folder having the following directory structure.
KONICAMINOLTA
CM-S100w ..............SpectraMagic NX-executable files and other files used for execution
Color ..................Files related to the “Tips on Colors” pages
Navigation..........Files related to the Navigation window
PIC .....................Image files used by SpectraMagic NX
Template ............Template files
Common ..................Files related to graphic objects

When you create a template, save it in the Template folder mentioned above.

2.10.2 Reading a Template File

You can change the window view by reading a template file previously created or included with the
SpectraMagic NX software.
1. Select File - Template - Load Template from the menu bar.
The Open dialog appears.
Functions

2. Select a template file and click the Open button.

Other

You can also load a template file by double-clicking the template icon in the Template Window.

To customers upgrading to the current version of the SpectraMagic NX

(CM-S100w) from a former version
Template files created with Ver. 1.2 does not include tolerance. Consequently, when a template file
created with Ver. 1.2 is opened with the current version, for which tolerance is specified, the specified
tolerance becomes invalid.

134
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.3 Setting Startup Options

You can specify whether to open a template file and whether to connect the instrument when the
SpectraMagic NX software is started.
1. Select File - Startup Options from the menu bar.
The Startup Options dialog box appears.

2. Specify the start options.

Your selection will take effect at the next startup.

Browse button

Functions
Other

■ Startup Options dialog box

Default Template
Open Template at Startup
When this option is checked, the file specified in Template Filename will open at startup. When the
SpectraMagic NX software is started for the first time, the window specified in the “Welcome to
SpectraMagic NX” dialog box is set as the default template.
Browse button
Click the Browse button to select a template file.

135
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Connection
Run in Instrument Mode
When this option is checked, SpectraMagic NX starts in the instrument mode, which is used to
connect and operate an instrument.

Establish Connection with Instrument at Startup

When this option is checked, a connection with the instrument is automatically established at
startup.

Show Calibration Dialog after connection

When this option is checked, the calibration dialog box appears after the connection is established.

Run in Demo Mode

When this option is checked, the SpectraMagic NX software starts in demo mode. In demo mode,
the SpectraMagic NX software can be operated as if the instrument were connected even when the
instrument is not actually connected. When you attempt to take a measurement, a random
measurement result is displayed.
List
Add Data by Row Unit
Each sample data is displayed in one row in the list window. Up to 5000 pieces of data can be stored
in a document file.
This is the default setting.

Tree List
Add Data by Column Unit
Each sample data is displayed in one column in the list window. Up to 4000 pieces of data can be
stored in a document file.
Functions
Other

136
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.4 Locking Files Ê

This function is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.
You can set a lock to an opened document file to disable the ability to edit the template.
1. Select File - File Locking from the menu bar.

The File Locking dialog box appears.

Functions

2. Enter ID for the file twice to disable edit operations and click the OK button.
Other

3. Save the document file.

When an attempt is made to edit a template in a file-locked document file (an attempt to enter edit
mode), a dialog box appears requiring the input of the ID. If the typed ID does not match the
specified one, template cannot be editied.

137
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.5 Security Functions Ê

This function is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.
You can set the SpectraMagic NX so that only users registered in advance can use it.
You can record, as history data, which registered user does what operation and when.

2.10.5-a Enabling the Security Functions

1. Select Tool - Security Setting from the menu bar.
The Security Setting dialog box appears.

2. Select the user management method and click the Yes button.
When “Use private database” is selected, the SpectraMagic NX manages a user database
independently that is specified by selecting Tool - Security - User Manager.
When “Synchronize with User and Group setting of Operating System” is selected, the user
management settings specified to the operating system are applied.
Note: DO NOT select this setting unless you are logged in as an Administrator on the computer
being used. If this setting is selected by someone who is not logged in as an Administrator, it
will immediately become impossible for SpectraMagic NX to be operated except by someone
logged in as Administrator.
When “Use private database” is selected, the Add New User dialog box appears.
Functions
Other

138
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

3. In the Add New User dialog box, register a user and click the OK button.
To register a user for the first time, “Administrator” is displayed for the group.
“Security Setting” under the Tool menu in the menu bar changes to “Security”.
The “Security” option has a sub menu containing “User Manager”, “Restriction”, “Audit Trail” and
“Security Option”.
These sub menu options can only be operated by a user with administrator privilege.

2.10.5-b Managing the User Database

1. Select Tool - Security - User Manager from the menu bar.
The User Management dialog box appears.

2. Register new users or edit the existing users.

Functions
Other

139
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.5-c Setting the Operation Limit for Each User Group

1. Select Tool - Security - Restriction from the menu bar.
The Set up Operation Limit dialog box appears.

2. Select a user group by clicking the Manager and Worker tabs and specify the operations allowed to
each group.
The users in the Administrator group can perform all operations displayed under “Operations”.
Functions
Other

140
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.5-d Showing the Audit Trail

1. Select Tool - Security - Audit Trail from the menu bar.

The Audit Trail dialog box appears.

The following items are recorded on each tab.

System tab
Start, end, create new file, file read, file save
Instrument tab
Functions

Change of measurement conditions, UV adjustment, calibration data read, instrument initialization,

Other

calibration
Measurement tab
Data add/delete operations such as target measurement, measurement, or data reading.

141
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.5-e Setting the Security Functions

1. Select Tool - Security - Security Options from the menu bar.
The Security Options dialog box appears.

2. Specify the parameters of the security functions.

■ Security Option dialog box

Illegal Access Handling tab
(When "Use private database" is selected in the Security Setting dialog box)
Set the function that enables the system to determine unauthorized access and notify the
administrator with an e-mail when a log-in attempt fails several times.
This option can be used when the server specified with “E-mail setting” and subsequent parameters
supports this function.

Send e-mail to administrator when illegal access is detected

Set whether to use the unauthorized access prevention function.
When this option is checked, the parameters under “E-mail setting” can be entered.
Number of authentication failure
When the unauthorized access prevention is enabled, specify the limit number of log-in
authorization failures.
When successive log-in attempts fail and exceed the specified limit number, the system sends an e-
mail to the address specified in “Destination setting” to notify of the unauthorized access.

Audit Trail tab

Functions
Other

Specify the parameters of the history file to record the operation history of the SpectraMagic NX.
Location of log files
Specify the location to store the history file in the Storing Location dialog displayed by clicking the
Browse button.
When history is saved with the NTFS file system
The destination is limited by the OS.
Read the instruction manual for your OS carefully before specifying the destination. History may
not be properly saved depending on the destination.
The default destination is the shared folder.

142
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Maximum size of log file

Specify the maximum capacity of the history file.
When the history data exceeds the maximum capacity, a new history file is created.
Maximum number of records in log file
Specify the number of records to be displayed when showing the history.
The number of records to be displayed represents the total number of the records displayed on the
three tabs: System, Instrument and Measurement.
Password Management tab
(When "Use private database" is selected in the Security Setting dialog box)
Specify the effective period of the user password.
When the effective period counted from the user registration ends, the user is prompted to change
the password at startup.

Functions
Other

143
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.6 Creating a New Data File

You can create a new document file (data file) for storing sample data by selecting a template file
previously created or included with the SpectraMagic NX software. You can also change the window
view.
1. Select File - New from the menu bar.
The Create New Document dialog box appears.

2. Select a template file and click the OK button.

■ Create New Document dialog box

Browse Templates
When a template filename is selected, a preview of the file is displayed in the right pane.
Functions
Other

Set specified file as default template

When this option is checked, the template file you selected will open the next time the
SpectraMagic NX software is started.

144
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.7 Opening a Data File

In addition to the data files created with the SpectraMagic NX, you can open the data files created with
the existing color data software (SpectraMagic Ver.3.6, SpectraMagic Ver.3.3, or ChromaMagic) and
those saved with the CM-5/CR-5 through the USB connection (.bdt).
1. Select File - Open from the menu bar.
The Open dialog box appears.

2. Select the type of file to be opened.

The file names of the specified file type are displayed.

3. Select the desired file and click the Open button.

Up to 20 files can be selected and opened simultaneously.

When the data file created with SpectraMagic Ver.3.6 or SpectraMagic

Functions

Ver.3.3 is opened
Other

When the data file created with SpectraMagic Ver.3.6 (.wsv) or SpectraMagic Ver.3.3 (.mdb) is selected
and the Open button is clicked, the file is converted into a data file in SpectraMagic NX format (.mes).
Then, the converted file is opened.

■ When the file in SpectraMagic Ver.3.6 format (.wsv) is opened

The file converted into mes is created in the folder of the selected original wsv file with the same file
name. Then, the converted file is opened.
When a wsv file with the same name already exists in the folder, a tilde is prefixed to the name of the
converted file. The number of tildes is not limited as long as files of the same name exist.

145
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ When the file in SpectraMagic Ver.3.3 format (.mdb) is opened

One mdb file can record two or more records. After the conversion, mes files are created by the number
of records in the file. In the folder of the original mdb file, a new folder with the same name as the
original mdb file is created, and the files converted into mes are created in the new folder. The name of
the mes files are the same as each record name for reflectance data and are in the form of “record name
(Tra)” for transmittance data. If, however, characters not allowed to be used in a file name in Windows
(/, :, etc.) are included in the original record name, such characters are omitted from the file name.
When a mdb file with the same name already exists in the folder, a tilde is prefixed to the name of the
converted file. The number of tildes is not limited as long as files of the same name exist.
An mdb file can store up to 200 characters for a comment, but an mes file can only store up to 80
characters. Consequently, the 81st and following characters will be deleted after the conversion.
After two or more mes files are created, the Open dialog box appears. Specify the file to be opened.

■ When a data file of 6 banks is opened

When the CM-2600d is used for measurement, SpectraMagic Ver.3.6 and SpectraMagic Ver.3.3 can
create a file with data of 6 bank statuses (SCI/100%, SCI/0%, SCI/adjust, SCE/100%, SCE/ 0%, and
SCE/adjust). Since the SpectraMagic NX can create a data file with a maximum of 3 banks, when a file
with 6 banks is converted into an mes file, the target or sample data is divided into 3 pieces of data.
Consequently, there will be 3 types of 2-bank data such as SCI+SCE/100%, SCI+SCE/0%, and SCI
+SCE/adjust. Each type of data is named “Target data name_100%”, “Target data name_0%”,
“Target data name_adj”, “Sample data name_100%”, “Sample data name_0%”, and “Sample data
name_adj”.

■ Maximum number of data pieces for a created SpectraMagic NX file (.mes)

Since an mes file is created by converting all data recorded in the original data file (wsv or mdb), it may
contain more than 5,000 pieces of data. However, the SpectraMagic NX can record up to 5,000 pieces
of data. Consequently, when a file with more than 5,000 pieces of data is opened with the SpectraMagic
NX, all data can be displayed on the screen, but the data from a new measurement cannot be added.

When the data file created with ChromaMagic is opened

When the data file created with ChromaMagic (.mdb) is selected and the Open button is clicked, the file
is converted into a data file in SpectraMagic NX format (.mes), and the converted file opens.
One mdb file can record the data of several illuminants. If a file contains such data, a new file is created
for each illuminant.
Since SpectraMagic NX can handle a file with a maximum of 5,000 pieces of data, it divides an mdb file
containing more than 5,000 pieces of data and creates data files containing 5,000 or less pieces of data.
A new folder with the same name as the original mdb file is created in the same folder as the mdb file.
Functions

Files converted into mes format are created in the new folder. The mes files containing 5000 or less
Other

pieces of data are created for each illuminant and named sequentially as “chroma_1_C.mes”, (a data file
with 5000 or less pieces of data of illuminant C), and so on.

* An mdb file containing Munsell data cannot be read with SpectraMagic NX. Data created with color
spaces other than Munsell can be converted and handled as data files in the SpectraMagic NX format.
* ChromaMagic assigns attribute XE to manually input data to indicate a device name. When such data
is converted into an mes file, the attribute is converted into attribute InputXYZ.
* For data created with the L*u*v* color space, the setting of E*uv tolerance is not reflected in the con-
verted data.

146
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

* When SpectraMagic NX is used to read the mdb file saved with ChromaMagic, the same operating sys-
tem that was used to operate ChromaMagic or later is required.
* Only one comment line can be displayed in SpectraMagic NX. Therefore, if there are any line breaks
in the comment assigned to a sample data, only the first line is displayed on the list. However, you can
see the entire comment in the Data Property dialog box.

When the data file saved with the CM-5/CR-5 through the USB connection is opened
When the data file saved with the CM-5/CR-5 through the USB connection (.bdt) is selected and the Open
button is clicked, the file is converted into a data file in SpectraMagic NX format (.mes), and the converted
file opens.

When a text data file is opened Ê

This function is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.
When a text-formatted data file (.txt or .csv) is selected and the Open button is clicked, the
SpectraMagic NX software processes it as a file of manually entered data. The data attribute of each
piece of data will be either “Manually input spectral data” or “Manually input colorimetric data”. Only
the data files in the following format can be opened.

The mark represents a CR (carriage return) code.

Format of spectral reflectance data

100 Version No.

REF A string which indicates that this is spectral reflectance data.

### Start wavelength (360 or 400)

### End wavelength (700 or 740)

10 Wavelength pitch (10)

39 No. of reflectance wavelengths (39 including the start and end

wavelengths)
# No. of banks (1, 2 or 3)

#### No. of data pieces (1 to 5000)

When the number of data pieces actually entered is less than this
value, a reading error occurs.
When the number of data pieces actually entered is more than
this value, the excessive data will not be read.
Functions

###.### ###.### Spectral reflectance, data name

Other

∼ Spectral data consist of three integer digits, a decimal point and

###.### ###.### Data name three decimal-place digits.
When the integer section has less than three digits, fill in the
blank with 0 (zero) or a space.
Data name: A name of up to 64 characters can be input. 2-byte
characters can also be used. (Name can be omitted.)
The spectral reflectance data and data name are delimited with a
tab character when it is in text format (.txt), and with the delim-
iter specified in the Control Panel when it is in csv format (.csv).
[EOF]

147
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Format of colorimetric data

100 Version No.

XYZ A string which indicates that this is colorimetric data.

## Observer (2 or 10)

# No. of illuminants (1, 2 or 3)

## Illuminant 1 Enter the following string correspond-

ing to the illuminant.

Illuminant String
A 1
C 2
Illuminant 2 D50 3
##
Omit this line when D65 4
illuminant 2 is not used. F2 5
F6 6
F7 7
F8 8
## Illuminant 3 F10 9
Omit this line when
F11 10
illuminant 3 is not
used. F12 11
D55 12
D75 13
U50 14
ID50 15
ID65 16

# No. of banks (1, 2 or 3)

#### No. of data pieces (1 to 5000)

When the number of data pieces actually entered is less than this
value, a reading error occurs.
When the number of data pieces actually entered is more than
this value, the excessive data will not be read.
###.### ∼ ###.### Data name Colorimetric data, data name
Colorimetric data consist of three integer digits, a decimal point
and three decimal-place digits.
Functions
Other

When the integer section has less than three digits, fill in the
blank with 0 (zero) or a space.
Data name: A name of up to 64 characters can be input. 2-byte
characters can also be used. (Name can be omitted.)
The colorimetric data and data name are delimited with a tab
character when it is in text format (.txt), and with the delimiter
specified in the Control Panel when it is in csv format (.csv).
[EOF]

148
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

List of error codes

An error code on the table below is displayed when an error occurs while opening a text data file.
Description
ERR 01 The version is not “100”.
ERR 02 The fixed character is not correct. The fixed character is not “REF”
or “XYZ”.
ERR 03 The start wavelength is not correct.
ERR 04 The end wavelength is not correct.
ERR 05 The wavelength pitch is not correct.
ERR 06 The number of reflectance wavelengths is not correct.
ERR 07 The bank number is not correct.
ERR 08 The number of illuminants is not correct.
ERR 09 Illuminant 1 is not correct.
ERR 10 Illuminant 2 is not correct.
ERR 11 Illuminant 3 is not correct.
ERR 12 The observer is not correct.
ERR 13 The number of data pieces is not sufficient.
ERR 14 The number of data pieces is not sufficient. (The data number is less
than 39 for the spectral reflectance data, or less than 3 for colorimet-
ric data.)
ERR 15 The data contains characters other than “0” to “9” and a decimal
point.

Functions
Other

149
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.8 Arranging Windows with/without Overlapping

When two or more data files are opened, you can select whether the windows are to be displayed in an
overlapping or tiled arrangement.
1. Select Window - Cascade or Tile from the menu bar.
The windows are displayed in either an overlapping arrangement (Cascade) or a side-by-side
arrangement (Tile).

2.10.9 Merging Multiple Data Files

When 2 or more data files are open, you can merge them into 1 file.
1. Select Edit - Merge from the menu bar.

The Merge dialog box appears.

2. Select the data files to be merged, and then click the Merge button.
The Save As dialog box appears. Specify the file name and other options and save the file.
A new, merged file is created while the original data files remain.
A data file contains up to 5000 pieces of sample data.
If the number of data exceeds 5000, you cannot merge files.

■ Merge dialog box

Functions
Other

Bank
Specify the number of banks. You can merge data files as long as the number of banks setting for
each file is the same.

150
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Group
When the number of banks is 2 or 3, specify the group traits. You can merge data files as long as
their group traits are the same.
The data files of the specified number of banks and group traits are displayed.

2.10.10 Starting Navigation

1. Select Help - Navigation from the menu bar.
The HTML-formatted tutorial is displayed.
Next
This button can be selected when the Navigation window is active. Click this button to have the next
page appear in the Navigation window. This button appears only after the Previous command has
been used. This is the same operation as selecting Help - Navigation - Next from the menu bar.

Previous
This button can be selected when the Navigation window is active. Click this button to have the
previous page appear in the Navigation window. This is the same operation as selecting Help -
Navigation - Previous from the menu bar.

2.10.11 Viewing the Instruction Manual

1. Select Help - Manual from the menu bar.
The instruction manual is displayed in PDF format.

Functions
Other

151
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.12 View Settings of Each Window

You can specify view setting details such as the background colors of the List Window, the Canvas
Window (Display/Printing Views) and the Status Window.
1. Select Tool - View Settings from the menu bar.
Or, right-click somewhere in the canvas window where no graphic object is pasted, and select View
Settings from the displayed context menu.
The Display Settings dialog box appears.

2. Specify the view setting details for each window.

■ Display Settings dialog box

Data List tab
Functions
Other

Tree - Color Setting

Background:
Specify a background color for the tree.

List - Default Grid Size

Specify the normal size for the list display. This setting is used as the default size for Zoom In/Out
display (page 119).

Auto Adjust Col Width:

Check this option to automatically adjust the column width of the list according to the number of
displayed digits.

152
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

List - Categorized List

Show Statistics:
Check this option to display statistics in the list for a data group when Classification by Target -
Absolute data or Classification by Target - Target ** is selected. The color of the statistics line can
be selected from the box at right.

Show Linked Target:

Check this option to display the linked target data in the list for a data group when Classification by
Target - Target ** is selected. The color of the linked target line can be selected from the box at
right.

List - Color Setting

Background:
Specify a background color for the list.

Display View tab, Printing View tab

Graphics Window - Color Setting
Background:
You can specify the background color of the display view.

Grid
Show Grid:
When this option is checked, a grid is displayed in the background of the window. You can specify
the color and interval of the grid from the box on the right. For the color setting method, see the
following section.
The interval can be specified between 5 and 20 in the unit of mm.

Display Header, Footer:

When this option is checked, the header and footer appear on the view. Setting items
available only on
Display Printing Layout: the Display View
When this option is checked, the print layout lines are displayed on the tab
background of the view. The color of the print layout lines is the same
as the grid lines.

Status tab
Status Window - Color Setting
Background:
Functions

You can specify the background color of the status window.

Other

General tab
Screen Mode
Allow editing canvas window:
When this option is checked, the Edit Mode command under Tool in the menu bar can be selected. If
this option is not checked, the edit mode and run mode cannot be switched.

153
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE
Functions
Other

154
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.13 Color Setting

The color button appears, allowing you to select colors.

1. Click the color button.

To select a color other than those shown in the palette, click the Other button.

Currently selected colors

2. Select a color from the palette or create a desired color.

When the Other button is clicked, the Color dialog box appears.

Functions
Other

155
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.14 Setting Options

1. Select Tool - Option from the menu bar.
The Option dialog box appears.

2. Specify the sound, file-related functions, and list extension functions as necessary.

■ Option dialog box

Effect tab
Functions

Sound Setting
Other

Provides sound in WAV format during measurement.

You can select a sound to be played in response to a particular result during judgement operation.
External software setting
External software can be started before or after performing the measurement and according to the
measurement results.
However, the external software set in Before Meas. will not work for a remote measurement.
For interval measurement, the external software set in Before Meas. runs only one time initially. The
external software set in After Meas. runs every time once the measurement is completed.

156
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

File tab
File Path Setting

Load
Specify the default file path that is displayed when File - Open is selected from the menu bar.

Load Template
Specify the default file path that is displayed when File - Template - Read Template is selected from
the menu bar.

Save
Specify the default file path that is displayed when File - Save As is selected from the menu bar.

Save Template
Specify the default file path that is displayed when File - Template - Save as Template is selected
from the menu bar.

When these options are checked, the specified file paths are used for corresponding occasions.
When they are not checked, the file paths that were used last time are used.

Start up Page Setting

Functions

Navigation
Other

Specify the location of the navigation start page “Index.htm”.

Auto Save Setting

Auto Save On
When this option is checked, data files are backed up automatically. The back up file names are
prefixed with “~” (tilde). A limited user who logged in the OS cannot use specific file paths. In such
a case, the auto save is disabled.

Automatically save each measurement

When this option is checked, data files are saved by overwriting after every measurement.

157
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Other
Store Edit Mode enabled/disabled status
When this option is checked, the document file is saved in the current mode. When this option is not
checked, the file is always saved in run mode.

List tab
List Expansionary Setting

Add Header to Top of Copy Text

When the data in the list is selected and copied while this option is checked, the characters at the
beginning are also copied.

Row Select On
When this option is checked, clicking any point in the list selects the line including the point.

Fast list redraw (User equation results will not be shown during redraw)
Functions

When this option is checked, the items in the list window are displayed quickly. Note that if a user
Other

equation is set to the list item, the equation is not displayed.

This setting is not reflected until the software is restarted.

Allow row height resizing

When this option is checked, the height of the row in the list can be adjusted. This setting is not
reflected until the software is restarted.

158
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.15 Sending Data Files by E-mail

A data file can be sent by e-mail as an attachment.
1. Select File - Send Mail from the menu bar.
With some e-mail software programs, a parameter setting dialog box may appear. Specify each
parameter accordingly.
The window for sending E-mail appears.

2. Type the destination address and subject and send the mail.

Functions
Other

159
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.16 Downloading Calibration Data to the Instrument

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer or the chroma meter is connected and the
protection key is attached to the computer.
You can download calibration data from the SpectraMagic NX software to the instrument. Use this
function before using a new white calibration plate for the instrument or a new user calibration standard
for calibration channels 01 to 19 with CR Series.
• When the CM-26dG/26d/25d is connected, this procedure can be used only to set user calibration
data. To set white calibration data, use the Configuration Tool CM-CT1, which can be downloaded
from https://www.konicaminolta.com/instruments/download/software/color/cmct/index.html.
• When the CM-36dG, CM-36dGV, or CM-36d is connected, this procedure cannot be used. When a
new white calibration plate is purchased from Konica Minolta, a software tool for writing the
calibration data to the instrument will also be included.

1. Select Instrument - Set Calibration Data.

The Calibration Data dialog box appears.

2. Specify the calibration value.

The method varies depending on the connected instrument. Refer to page 161 to 162 for details.
3. Click the OK button to start downloading the data to the instrument. If the CR-400/410 is connected,
Functions

when the OK button is clicked, the calibration data is downloaded to the instrument and calibration
Other

of the selected channel is performed.

160
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Calibration Data dialog box (when the CM-3000 Series, CM-2600d/2500d,

CM-2500c, CM-25cG, CM-512m3A or CM-700d/600d is connected)
When the CM-3600A, CM-3610A or CM-2600d/2500d is connected, confirm that the White
Calibration Setting radio button has been selected.
When the CM-25cG is connected, confirm that the White calibration setting tab is selected.
When the CM-26dG/26d/25d is connected, only User Calibration data can be set.
User Calibration is supported only on the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition when a
CM-3600A/3610A, CM-25cG, CM-26dG/26d/25d, CM-2600d/2500d, or CM-700d/600d is
connected. For information on user calibration, refer to 2.10.18 Specifying a User Calibration
Value to the Instrument Ê on page 171.
2. Click the Load button. When the dialog box for opening a file appears, specify the file containing
the new white calibration data and click the Open button.

Sample display

Functions
Other

161
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Calibration Data Setting dialog box (when the CM-5/CR-5 is connected)

You cannot set (change) the calibration data for the built-in white calibration plate of the instrument.
To use an external white calibration plate such as when using the optional White Calibration Plate
CM-A210 for white calibration when performing Petri Dish or Mini Petri Dish measurements, refer to
2.10.18 Specifying a User Calibration Value to the Instrument Ê on page 171.

■ Calibration Data dialog box (when the CR-400/410 is connected)

2-1) Select the Color Space on Edit-Mode to use.
2-2) Select the calibration channel (Ch.) to calibrate in the Calibration Data List, and click the Edit but-
ton. The Edit Calibration Data dialog appears.
2-3)Input the calibration channel name and the calibration data.
Calibration of a channel in which calibration data have already been set can be performed by selecting
the desired channel in step 2-2) above and clicking Calibrate. Calibration of the selected channel will
then be performed.
Functions
Other

162
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.17 Downloading Configuration Data to the Instrument

This procedure is available only when the protection key is attached to the computer.
You can use the SpectraMagic NX software to configure the instrument for standalone operation (when
not connected to the computer).
1. Select Instrument - Standalone Configuration - Standalone Configuration.

A confirmation dialog box appears if the instrument is not connected.

To create standalone configuration file for CM-5, click Yes. To create standalone configuration file
for CR-5, click No. In other cases, click Cancel, and specify instrument settings after connecting the
instrument.

The Standalone Configuration dialog box appears. Click the View button to see the details of the
target data with the specified number stored in the instrument, if the CM-2600d/2500d, CM-2500c,
CM-25cG or CM-512m3A is connected.
Functions
Other

2. Specify or enter an appropriate value for each item.

The contents of the Standalone Configuration dialog box varies depending on the connected
instrument. Refer to page 164 to 170 and the instrument instruction manual for details.
3. Click the OK button to start downloading data to the instrument.

163
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Standalone Configuration dialog box (when the CM-2600d/2500d or

CM-2500c is connected)
2. Specify or enter an appropriate value for each item. Or click the Load button and load the existing
configuration file.

■ Standalone Configuration dialog box (when the CM-25cG is connected)

2. Click the various tabs and specify or enter an appropriate value for each item. Or click the Load but-
ton and load the existing configuration file.
• On the Measurement Condition tab, you can set the measurement conditions (measurement
mode, observer/illuminant settings, averaging settings, selected target, auto target selection).
• On the View tab, you can set how the data will be shown (display type, color space, equation) on
the instrument display.
• On the User Index tab, you can set up to 3 User Indexes and User Classifications (available only
when the instrument firmware is Ver. 1.10 or later).
• On the User Illuminant tab, you can set the User Illuminant (available only when the instrument
firmware is Ver. 1.03 or later).
• On the System tab, you can set instrument system settings such as display language, date/time,
display brightness, etc.
Functions
Other

164
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Standalone Configuration dialog box (when the CM-26dG/26d/25d is con-

nected)
• On the User Index tab, you can set up to 3 User Indexes and User Classifications.
• On the User Illuminant tab, you can set the User Illuminant. (A name for the user illuminant can
be set only if the instrument firmware is ver. 1.10 or later.)

• Other settings for standalone use can be set using the Configuration Tool CM-CT1, which can be
downloaded from https://www.konicaminolta.com/instruments/download/software/color/cmct/
index.html.

■ Standalone Configuration dialog box (when the CM-700d/600d is connected)

2. Specify or enter an appropriate value for each item to set measurement conditions and the instru-
ment screen display. Select the color space(s) which will be displayed on the instrument. On the
"Option" tab, you can specify optional items related to the instrument.

Functions
Other

165
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Standalone Configuration dialog box (when the CM-512m3A is connected)

2. Click the Meas. Condition or System tab and specify or enter an appropriate value for each item.

■ Standalone Configuration dialog box (for CM-5/CR-5)

Note:
Even if an instrument is not connected, Standalone Configuration data for the CM-5/CR-5 can be set
and stored in a Condition file as described on page 169 for later transfer to the instrument via a USB
memory device. Settings available when creating a Condition file without an instrument connected
correspond to the latest firmware version of the CM-5/CR-5, which may be different than the
firmware version of the instrument to which the Condition file is applied. If a setting item in the
Condition file is not available on the instrument, the current instrument setting for that item will be
left unchanged when the Condition file is read. Settings available in CM-5/CR-5 firmware version
1.10 and later that are not available in earlier firmware versions include:
Meas. Condition tab:
Measurement Area: “3mm” when Measurement Type: “Petri Dish”
Screen tab:
Spectral View Setting group
“Show Target” checkbox
Spectral Data Display: “Absorbance” or “Absorbance + Specific Wavelength”

If a CM-5 or CR-5 is connected and Standalone Configuration is set directly to the instrument, only
the settings applicable to the firmware version of the connected instrument will be shown.
2. Specify or enter an appropriate value for each item.
Functions
Other

On the Meas.Condition tab, you can set the measurement conditions (Measurement Type,
Measurement Area, Specular Component, etc.) for the instrument.

166
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

M Specular Component can be set with the CM-5 only.

On the Color tab, you can set the observation conditions (Observer, Illuminant, Color Space, Differ-
ence Formula, etc.) to be displayed on the instrument.
M Illuminant 2 and ISO Brightness are only available with the CM-5.

Functions
Other

With the CM-5/CR-5, the screen display can be customized. The customization can be set up on the
Screen tab.

167
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

M Spectral View Setting is only available with the CM-5.

On the Default Tolerance tab, you can set the default tolerance which will be automatically set when
the target color is selected with the instrument.
M ISO Brightness is only available with the CM-5.
Functions
Other

On the User Index tab, you can set up to three user-specific operational expressions based on the color space.

168
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

M The User Index tab is only available with the CM-5.

On the System tab, you can set optional items regarding the instrument.

You can load the existing Condition file by clicking the Load button.
You can save the current setting as an Condition file by clicking the Save button. The file name can-
Functions

not contain characters other than those that can be set on the instrument. Please refer to “Batch Set-
Other

ting of Conditions” in the instrument instruction manual.

The settings in all tabs of the Standalone Configuration dialog box are saved in one file.
You can save the Condition file you created (.cnd) on a USB memory device and attach the memory
device to the USB connection terminal of the instrument to load the file. To do this, save the Condi-
tion file in the following folder.

Drive:\Instrument name
(Example) When the USB memory device is Drive F and the instrument is the CM-5:
F:\CM-5

169
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Standalone Configuration dialog box (when the CR-400/410 is connected)

2. Click the Color Space or Options tab and specify or enter an appropriate value for each item.
Functions
Other

170
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.18 Specifying a User Calibration Value to the Instrument Ê

This procedure is available only when the CM-3600A, CM-3610A, CM-25cG, CM-26dG/26d/25d,
CM-2600d/2500d, CM-700d/600d or CM-5/CR-5 is connected and the protection key is attached to the
computer.
If the connected instrument is other than CM-5/CR-5, this function is supported by the SpectraMagic
NX Professional Edition only.
In addition to the white calibration, you can perform user calibration. This section describes the
procedure to specify a user calibration value and to enable the user calibration.
When user calibration is enabled, a dialog for user calibration appears after white calibration during the
calibration process described on page 35. If, however, the CM-25cG, CM-26dG/26d/25d, CM-700d/
600d or CM-5/CR-5 is connected, the user calibration described here is performed as white calibration
during the calibration process described on page 35.
1. Select Instrument - Set Calibration Data from the menu bar.

The Calibration Data dialog box appears.

When the CM-25cG, CM-26dG/26d/25d, or CM-700d/600d is connected, select the “User Cal.” tab.
2. Set the calibration value.
The setting procedure varies depending on the model of the connected instrument. For the procedure
for the individual models, refer to pages 172 to 175.
Functions

3. Clicking the OK button starts the writing to the instrument.

Other

171
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Calibration Data dialog box (When the CM-3600A, CM-3610A or

CM-2600d/2500d is connected)

1. Check User Calibration.

When the CM-2600d/2500d is connected, check one of SCI and SCE in the User Calibration Mode
frame for which you want to perform user calibration or check both.
User calibration is now enabled.

Sample display when

the CM-2600d/2500d
is connected

2-2. Select the User Calibration Setting radio button.

This enables entering the user calibration value into the list.
2-3. Enter the spectral reflectance to specify the calibration value.
The same calibration value is applied to all measurement areas.
Functions
Other

172
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Calibration Data Setting dialog box (When the CM-25cG is connected) or User
calibration setting dialog box (When the CM-26dG/26d/25d is connected)
2-1. When using the CM-25cG, select the User Cal. tab.
When using the CM26dG/26d/25d, only the user calibration data will be shown.

(Sample display when (Sample display when

CM-25cG is connected.) CM-26dG is connected.)

2-2. Input the calibration plate ID (up to 8 characters).

2-3. Check Set to user calibration mode. User calibration is enabled.
2-4. Select the settings to write user calibration for.
When using the CM-25cG, select the measurement area (MAV and/or SAV) in Write data.
When using the CM-26dG/26d/25d, select the measurement area (MAV and/or SAV) and SCI
and/or SCE in Write data.
2-5. Enter the spectral reflectance to specify the user calibration values for all wavelengths for all
selected settings.
Or click the Load button to load an existing calibration value file and set the values.
• You can save the current values as a calibration value file by clicking the Save button.
Functions
Other

173
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Calibration Data Setting dialog box (When the CM-700d/600d is connected)

2-1. Select the User Cal. tab.

Sample display when the CM-700d/600d is connected

The User Calibration check box and the User Cal. tab
are supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional
Edition only.

2-2. Check User Calibration.

User calibration is now enabled.
2-3. Enter the spectral reflectance to specify the calibration value. Or click the Load button to load the
existing calibration value file and set the value.
You can save the current value as a calibration value file by clicking the Save button.

■ Calibration Data Setting dialog box (When the CM-5/CR-5 is connected)

You can select User Calibration mode from the Meas.Condition tab on the Standalone Configuration
dialog box. For details, see page 162.
2-1. Select the type of the user calibration value to set from Select Calibration Data and click the Set
button.
Functions
Other

174
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2-2. When you selected Reflectance(User Calibration), select the measurement area and specular com-
ponent you want to set.

Selectable combinations are: LAV and SCI ( M ), LAV and SCE, MAV and SCI ( M ), MAV and
SCE, SAV and SCI ( M ), SAV and SCE.
M Specular Component can be set with the CM-5 only.

2-3. Set the calibration value by entering spectral reflectance or spectral absorbance. Or, click the Load
button to load the existing calibration value file and set the value.
When Reflectance(User Calibration) was selected, specific calibration values are applied to
measurement areas individually.
You can save the current value as a calibration value file by clicking the Save button. When
Reflectance(User Calibration) was selected, specific calibration value files will be generated for
measurement areas individually.
Functions
Other

175
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.19 Downloading User Index to the Instrument

This procedure is available only when the CM-25cG, CM-26dG/26d/25d, CM-5 or CR-400/410 is
connected and the protection key is attached to the computer.
You can use the SpectraMagic NX software to download an operational expression based on the color
space to the instrument.
1. Select Instrument - Standalone Configuration - User Index.
The User Index dialog box appears.
When the CM-25cG, CM-26dG/26d/25d, or CM-5 is connected, select Instrument - Standalone
Configuration from the menu bar.
When the Standalone Configuration dialog box appears, select User Index tab. For details, see page
165.

2. Select the number (No.), and click the Edit button.

The User Index Setting dialog appears.
Functions
Other

(Sample display when the CR-400/410 is connected)

176
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

3. Input the User Index Name, the User Index, and the User Classification.
Extended ASCII characters used as User Index Name may not be displayed correctly depending on
the language setting of the instrument.
If you change a User Index setting and load it into the instrument, previously loaded User
Classification definition for corresponding User Index channel inside the instrument will be cleared.
Even if you do not need to change the User Classification definition, if the User Index setting is
changed, the User Classification must be input again.

4. When the OK button is clicked, some dialogs for confirmation appear and the user index is down-
loaded to the instrument.

Functions
Other

177
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.20 Downloading the Target Data to the Instrument

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer excluding the CM-36dG Series or
CM-3000 Series, or the chroma meter is connected and the protection key is attached to the computer.
This operation is disabled when using the CM-5 if Specular Component in the Instrument Settings
dialog is set to SCI+SCE.
When using the CM-2600d/2500d, CM-2500c, CM-25cG, CM-26dG/26d/25d, CM-700d/600d, or
CM-5/CR-5, perform this procedure after turning off the instrument's data protection function.
1. In the list window, open a data group by selecting All Data - Target(s), select one piece of data and
select Instrument - Upload/Download - Download Target from the menu bar.
Or, right-click the target data and select Download Target from the displayed context menu.
The Target Download dialog box appears. You can select multiple targets and download them in
succession. If the CM-2500c, CM-25cG, CM-5/CR-5 or CR-400/410 is connected, only target data
consisting of a single bank of data can be downloaded.

2. Specify the details of the target data downloaded to the instrument.

For the procedure for the individual models, refer to pages 179 to 183.
3. Click the OK button to start downloading data to the instrument.
Functions
Other

When the CM-5 or CR-400/410 is connected, if the target data selected in step 1 is special data, the
data will be converted to colorimetric data and then be downloaded to the instrument.
The target data cannot be downloaded when the number of data banks is different from the setting in
the instrument.

178
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Target Download dialog box (when the CM-2600d/2500d, CM-2500c,

CM-26dG/26d/25d, or CM-25cG is connected)
Data tab

Target
Specify the target number in the instrument to which the data is to be downloaded. The number
displayed when you open the dialog box is the highest target number stored in the instrument + 1.
Click the View button to see the details of the target with the specified number stored in the
instrument.
Data Attribute
Attributes may include Type, Mask, Meas. Mode, Gloss and UV. The attributes that are shown
depend on the instrument that is connected. If the selected data is manually input spectral data or
manually input colorimetric data, specify the necessary attributes.
Target Attribute
These parameters cannot be edited.

Tolerance tab
The tolerances specified for the selected target data
are displayed.
• When using a CM-26dG/26d/25d or CM-25cG
with firmware version 1.2 or later, the maximum
number of tolerance items that can be set and
downloaded to the instrument is 14 items.
Functions
Other

179
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Target Download dialog box (when the CM-700d/600d is connected)

Data tab

Target
Specify the target number in the instrument to which the data is to be downloaded. The number
displayed when you open the dialog box is the smallest unregistered target number stored in the
instrument. Click the View button to see the details of the target with the specified number stored in
the instrument.
Data Attribute
Type, date, time, measurement area, specular component mode and comment are displayed. The
parameters other than comment cannot be edited for measured data. If the selected data is manually
input spectral data or manually input colorimetric data, also specify the settings for Mask and Gloss.

Tolerance tab
Enter tolerances for the selected target data.
Functions
Other

180
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Target Download dialog box (when the CM-5/CR-5 is connected)

Data tab

(Sample display when the target data is (Sample display when the target data is
Spectral) Colorimetric)

Target
Specify the target number in the instrument to which the data is to be downloaded. The number
displayed when you open this dialog box is the lowest target number in the instrument for which no
data has been registered. Click the View button to see the details of the target with the specified
number stored in the instrument.
Data Attribute
Type, Date, Time, Measurement Area, Specular Component and Comment are displayed.
The items other than Comment cannot be edited for measured data. The comment cannot contain
characters other than those that can be set on the instrument. Please refer to “Editing Target Color
Data: Edit Name” in the instrument instruction manual.
If the selected data is manually input spectral data or manually input colorimetric data, also specify
the settings for Mask and Gloss.
M Spectral is only displayed for the CM-5.
Tolerance tab
Enter the tolerances you want to set for the selected target data.
The default values are set by the SpectraMagic NX software.
Functions

M The tolerance for ISO Brightness can be set with the CM-5 only.
Other

181
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Target Download dialog box (when the CM-512m3A is connected)

Data tab

Target
Specify the target number in the instrument to which the data is to be downloaded. The number
displayed when you open the dialog box is the smallest unregistered target number stored in the
instrument. Click the View button to see the details of the target with the specified number stored in
the instrument.
Data Attribute
Type: Spectral (Cannot be changed.)
• It is not possible to download colorimetric target data to the instrument.

Tolerance tab
Enter tolerances for the selected target data.
Functions
Other

182
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Target Download dialog box (when the CR-400/410 is connected)

Target Information tab

Target No.
Specify the target number in the instrument to which the data is to be downloaded. The number
displayed when you open the dialog box is the highest target number stored in the instrument + 1.
Click the View button to see the details of the target with the specified number stored in the
instrument.
Use Tolerance judgement
When checked, tolerance values can be stored with the target.
Acceptance Criteria
Select “Elliptical Tolerance”, “Box Tolerance”, “Delta E” or “Box Tolerance and Delta E”.

Tolerance tab
The tolerances specified for the selected target data are displayed.

Functions
Other

183
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.21 Annual Service Recalibration Recommendation

Message
* This procedure is available only when the CM-3700A/CM-3700A-U, CM-36dG/CM-36dGV/
CM-36d, CM-3600A, CM-512m3A,5/CR-5, CM-25cG, CM-26dG/CM-26d/CM-25d, or
CM-700d/CM-600d is connected and the protection key is attached to the computer.
Annual service recalibration date is registered on the instrument at the factory or at the timing of
calibration service (or maintenance service).
On the CM-512m3A, CM-5/CR-5, or CM-700d/CM-600d, a message recommending service
calibration is displayed on the LCD screen at power-on approximately one year following the registered
annual service recalibration date, provided the annual service recalibration recommendation message
display is set to “ON” on the instrument.
On SpectraMagic NX, a dialog box recommending annual service recalibration is displayed at
connection approximately one year following the initial connection of the instrument and SpectraMagic
NX. (On the CM-512m3A, CM-5/CR-5, or CM-700d/CM-600d, this dialog box will be displayed only
if the annual service recalibration recommendation message display is set to “ON” on the instrument.)
With the CM-3700A/CM-3700A-U, CM-3600A/CM-3610A, and CM-512m3A, you can set the date
interval (1, 3, 7, 30, 180, or 365 days) to display this dialog box.

 Wavelength Analysis & Adjustment (WAA) License Warning

When the CM-36dG, CM-36dGV, or CM-36d is connected and a Wavelength Analysis & Adjustment
(WAA) license has been applied to the instrument, warning messages related to the WAA license will
be displayed as follows:
• When the license expiration date is within approximately 1 month of the current date, a warning
message that the license will expire soon will be displayed.
• When the license has expired, a message stating that the license has expired will be displayed.
When the license has expired, it will not be possible for WAA to be performed during calibration
until a new license has been purchased and applied.
Functions
Other

184
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.22 Sensor Sync Function

This procedure is available only when the spectrophotometer excluding the CM-36dG Series,
CM-3000 Series, CM-26dG Series, or the chroma meter is connected and the protection key is
attached to the computer.
This window shows the data structure (the relationship between target data and sample data) in the
instrument connected to SpectraMagic NX software.
Since the data is displayed in a tree structure, it is easy to select only necessary data and upload it in the
document file or download it to the instrument.
(1) Displaying the sensor sync window......................................................................... page 185
(2) Uploading target data............................................................................................... page 187
(3) Uploading sample data............................................................................................. page 188
• Uploading all data.................................................................................................... page 189
(4) Downloading target data from the document file to the instrument ........................ page 190
• Deleting data stored in the instrument ..................................................................... page 191
• Tolerance setting ...................................................................................................... page 191

(1)
Instrument PC
Connection
SpectraMagic NX
Target data
(2)
Sample data (3)
(Data stored in the mem-
ory of the instrument)

(4)

Displaying the sensor sync window

1. Connect the instrument.
If the instrument is already connected to the PC, the PC acquires the data stored in the instrument at
the time you select to show the sensor sync window from hidden status. Or, the PC acquires the data
when you connect the instrument to the PC with the sensor sync window being displayed.
Consequently, you do not have to connect the instrument from the beginning.
2. Select View - Sensor Sync Window from the menu bar.
The sensor sync window is displayed.
Functions
Other

185
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Instrument tree Items displayed in the view

(data structure in the instrument)

Note:
• The sensor sync window is always displayed at the front and can be operated as an independent win-
dow. It can also be docked with the list window or status window.
• If the instrument is disconnected while the sensor sync window is displayed, the data shown in the
sensor sync window disappears.
• While data is being acquired to the PC, a message window appears and indicates the progress. Do
not disconnect the instrument during this period.

■ Items displayed in the view

Instrument name Name of the instrument
Serial No. Unit number
Timestamp Date and time of the mea- When the CM-2600d/2500d or CM-2500c is con-
surement nected, the date and time are displayed in the order
of YYYY/MM/DD or DD/MM/YYYY according to
the display language setting and ROM version of the
instrument.
Data Number Data name (data number
assigned in the instrument)
Comment Comment
Observer Observer Shown only when data are colorimetric data. The
Illuminant 1 Primary illuminant settings displayed here are not the current instru-
Illuminant 2 Secondary illuminant ment settings but the settings at the time the colori-
metric target color data were input or a CR-5 or CR-
400/410 was used to measure the target or sample.
Make sure that the SpectraMagic NX settings are set
to the same settings.
Functions
Other

■ Information to be acquired but not displayed in the view

• Spectral reflectance data
When the CR-5 or CR-400/410 is connected, the colorimetric data is acquired.

■ When the CM-25cG is connected

• If the measurement mode for the target data, sample data, or target data linked to the sample data is
“Gloss only”, the data cannot be uploaded.

186
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Uploading target data

■ Using the drag & drop operation

1. Select the target data to upload from the instrument tree in the sensor sync window.
Note: Only one piece of data can be selected.
2. Drag and drop the target data into the Target(s) data group under All data in the list window.
Note:
• The data cannot be dropped into locations other than the Target(s) data group.
• If target data with the same name already exists in the document file, a confirmation dialog box
appears.

■ Using the right-click menu

1. Select the target data to upload from the instrument tree in the sensor sync window.
Note: Only one piece of data can be selected.
2. Right-click the data and open the right-click menu.
3. Select Upload Target.
Note: If target data with the same name already exists in the document file, a confirmation dialog
box appears.
Functions
Other

187
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ The dialog box that appears when target data with the same name exists in
the document file
When Yes is selected:
A new Target* data group is created under Classification by Target in the list window. All of the
sample data linked to this target data is uploaded.
Note: The name of the uploaded data is assigned automatically.

When No is selected:
The sample data linked to the selected target data is added to the existing Target* data group with
the same name under Classification by Target in the list window.
Note:
• If the same data already exists, the data is not uploaded.
• Whether the data is the same or not is determined by their properties, which are the date and time
of the measurement, the name of the target data being linked, and the spectral reflectance data or
colorimetric data.

Uploading sample data

■ Using the drag & drop operation

1. Select the sample data to upload from the view in the sensor sync window.
Note: One or more pieces of data can be selected.
2. Drag and drop the data into any of the data groups under Classification by Target in the list window.
Note:
• The data cannot be dropped into other locations.
• The data is added as the sample data linked to the target data in the data group where it is
dropped.
• When several pieces of data are selected, all of the pieces are linked to the same target data.
• If sample data with the same name already exists, a confirmation dialog box appears.
• The name of the data is assigned automatically.
Functions
Other

188
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Using the right-click menu

1. Select the sample data to load from the view in the sensor sync window.
Note: One or more pieces of data can be selected.
2. Right-click the data and open the right-click menu.
3. Select Upload Samples data.
The Target linkage dialog box appears.

■ The dialog box that appears when the same sample data exists in the
document file
When Yes is selected:
The data is added as new sample data linked to the target data.
Note: The name of the loaded sample data is assigned automatically.

When No is selected:
The data is added as sample data linked to the target data.
Note:
• If the same data already exists, the data is not uploaded.
• Whether the data is the same or not is determined by their properties, which are the date and time
of the measurement, the name of the target data being linked, and the spectral reflectance data or
colorimetric data.

Uploading all data

■ Using the drag & drop operation

1. Select the instrument name icon to upload from the instrument tree in the sensor sync window.
2. Drag and drop the instrument name icon into the Target(s) data group under All data in the list
window.
Note:
• The data cannot be dropped into locations other than the Target(s) data group.
• If target data with the same name already exists in the document file, a confirmation dialog box
appears.
Functions
Other

189
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Downloading target data from the document file to the instrument

• Data cannot be download to the instrument in the following cases:
• When the number of banks is different
• When the observer and illuminant are different (in the cases of manually-input colorimetric data,
CR-5 data or CR-400 data)
• When the CM-512m3A is connected, the toler-ance value specified for the target data is applied to
the downloaded data.
• All the data is download to the instrument as target data.

■ Using the drag & drop operation

1. Select the target data to download to the instrument from the list window.
Note: One or more pieces of data can be selected as long as the data is selected from All data -
Target(s) data group.
2. Drag and drop the data into the instrument tree in the sensor sync window.
A dialog box appears and the target data is added to the instrument.
Note: When the CM-5/CR-5 is connected, the instrument tree in the sensor sync window is
displayed in a closed state. Select the tree to display the tree again.

■ Using the right-click menu

1. Select the target data to write into the instrument from the list window.
Note: One or more pieces of data can be selected as long as the data is selected from All data -
Target(s) data group.
Functions
Other

2. Right-click the target data and open the right-click menu.

3. Select Download Target.
Alternatively, select data from All data - Target(s) data group, open the right-click menu, and select
Download Target.
A dialog box appears and the target data is added to the instrument.

The downloaded data is added as the last data in the instrument. When the CR-400 is connected,
however, you can specify the location for downloading data.

190
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Note:When the CM-5/CR-5 is connected, the instrument tree in the sensor sync window is
displayed in a closed state. Select the tree to display the tree again.

Deleting data stored in the instrument

This function is available only when the connected instrument is any of the following:
• CM-512m3A

1. To delete target data, select it from the instrument tree in the sensor sync window. (Only one piece of
data can be selected.)
To delete sample data, select it from the view in the sensor sync window. (One or more data pieces
can be selected.)
2. Right-click the data and select Delete from the right-click menu.
The Delete key can also be used instead of the Delete menu item.
3. A confirmation dialog box appears showing a message “Are you sure to delete selected data?”.
Click the OK button to delete the data.
Click the Cancel button to cancel the deletion.

Tolerance setting
The tolerance setting function is available when any of the following instruments are connected:
• CM-512m3A
• CM-5/CR-5
• CR-400/410
Select the target data from the instrument tree in the sensor sync window, open the right-click menu, and
select Tolerance Setting. The Tolerance Settings dialog box appears.

Functions
Other

191
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.23 Macro Operation Ê

This function is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition only.
You can automate various operations of SpectraMagic NX. Define each operation as a macro and
execute the defined macro.
When the CM-700d/600d is connected, you can use a macro to display an user-defined message on the
LCD screen of the instrument.

Defining a macro
1. Select Tool - Macro - Edit from the menu bar.

The Macro Setting dialog box appears.

Functions
Other

2. Define a macro.

192
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Macro Setting dialog box

Command list - Menu tab
The menu of the SpectraMagic NX is displayed. Select a required menu and click the −> button. The
selected menu is added to Macro on the right.
To delete a menu from Macro, select the menu from the list and click the <− button.
Command list - Command tab

The following command menus are displayed. Select a required menu and click the −> button. A
corresponding setting dialog box appears. When the setting finishes, the item is added to Macro on the
right.
To delete an item from Macro, select it from the list and click the <− button.
Message
Specify a message to be displayed while the macro is executed.
Up to 256 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
When a message is specified, it is displayed in a message box during macro execution. The message
box has the OK button. When the OK button is clicked, the macro continues.

Functions
Other

Tag
Specify a tag to a specific step in the macro.
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters can be used.

193
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Jump
You can jump to the tag that is specified in advance.
You need to specify the number to repeat the jump to the tag. The number of repeats can be set
between 1 and 9999.

Wait
You can interrupt the macro execution for a certain period of time or until any key is pressed.

Target selection
Specify the target data used in the macro.
If the specified target data is not found during macro execution, an error occurs.

Display message (for CM-700d/CM-600d)

When the CM-700d/CM-600d is connected, specify the message and display color used for the LCD
screen for each connected instrument individually, if necessary. (Up to four instruments may be
connected at one time.)
The Message text box shows the sample LCD screen of the instrument. You can enter ASCII code
characters within the range of 20 columns (20 alphanumeric characters) x 9 rows. For example if
you want to display a line of characters at the middle of the LCD screen, enter the characters on the
fifth row.
Functions
Other

194
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Command list - File tab

The menus related to file operation appear. Select a required menu and click the −> button, and the
menu will be added to Macro on the right.
To delete a menu from Macro, select the menu from the list and click the <− button.
MRU settings
MRU number Select the MRU number ("1", "2", "3", or "None") to be assigned to the specified
macro file, indicating the order in which it will appear in the Macro menu. If "None"
is selected, the macro file will be saved but will not be shown in the menu.
MRU label Set the label to be shown in the Macro menu for the specified macro file. The label
can be up to 20 characters long.
Macro File
Open Select a saved macro file and open it.
Save As Save the specified macro as a macro file (Extension: mmc).

Executing a macro
1. Select Tool - Macro from the menu bar and select Start or one of the 3 MRUs.

Selecting Start will start the most recently opened macro file
Selecting one of the three MRUs will start the corresponding macro file as defined in the Macro
Setting dialog.

The actions defined in Macro in the Macro Setting dialog box are executed sequentially from the top
to the bottom.
Functions
Other

195
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.24 Setting the Display of the Instrument Screen for

Remote Measurement
* This procedure is available only when the CM-700d/600d is connected.
When the CM-700d/600d is connected, the results of the measurement or pass/fail judgment for the
“target remote measurement” and “sample remote measurement” can be displayed on the LCD
screen of the instrument. You can check the measurement status on the LCD screen even when the
instrument is operated remotely from the PC.
1. Select Instrument - Remote Measurement from the menu bar and select Remote Measurement
Option.
The Remote Measurement Option dialog box appears.

2. Specify the following options for display items and colors.

Functions
Other

196
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Remote measurement option dialog box

Show the items on the display of instrument

When this box is checked, the items specified below are displayed on the instrument screen.
Specular Component
Since the CM-700d/600d can measure both SCI and SCE, specify the measurement mode to display the
result. The results of both measurements cannot be displayed simultaneously.
Display Items
Specify the item(s) of the measured data to be displayed. You can specify up to 8 items from the list
items specified in the procedure on page 46.
Note, however, that the following items cannot be specified: Lightness, Saturation, Hue, a* Evaluation,
b* Evaluation, Pseudo Color, Pseudo Color (Target), Opacity (ISO 2471), Opacity Difference (ISO
2471), Opacity (TAPPI T425 89%), Opacity Difference (TAPPI T425 89%), Haze (ASTM D1003-97),
and Haze Difference (ASTM D1003-97).
The table on the next page shows how the specified items are displayed on the LCD screen of the CM-
700d/600d.
Color
Specify the colors of the characters and background to be displayed.
The items which are related to the pass/fail judgment are displayed with colors assigned at Pass, Fail, or
Warning. The items that are not related to the pass/fail judgment are displayed with a color assigned as
Functions

Default.
Other

Save
Save the display item setting in a file.
Load
Load the display item setting that were stored in a saved file.

197
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

[Absolute Instrument [Color Instrument Instrument

[Other]
Data] display Difference] display display
X X ΔX dX MI MI
Y Y ΔY dY Tristimulus StrengthÊ Strength
Z Z ΔZ dZ Tristimulus Strength XÊ Strength X
L* L* ΔL* dL* Tristimulus Strength YÊ Strength Y
a* a* Δa* da* Tristimulus Strength ZÊ Strength Z
b* b* Δb* db* Pseudo-tristimulus StrengthÊ Pseudo St.
C* C* ΔC* dC* Pseudo-tristimulus Strength XÊ Pseudo StX
h h ΔH* dH* Pseudo-tristimulus Strength YÊ Pseudo StY
L99 L99 ΔL99 dL99 Pseudo-tristimulus Strength ZÊ Pseudo StZ
a99 a99 Δa99 da99 Dominant WavelengthÊ Domi.Wave
b99 b99 Δb99 db99 Excitation PurityÊ Ex.Purity
C99 C99 ΔC99 dC99 555Ê 555
h99 h99 ΔH99 dH99
x x Δx dx Instrument
y y Δy dy [Index]
display
u* u* Δu* du* Munsell Hue (JIS Z8721 1964)<Munsell Hue> H
v* v* Δv* dv* Munsell Value (JIS Z8721 1964)<Munsell Value> V
u' u' Δu' du' Munsell Chroma (JIS Z8721 1964)<Munsell Chroma> C
v' v' Δv' dv' WI(CIE 1982)<WI(CIE)> WI(CIE)
L (Hunter) L ΔL (Hunter) dL WI(ASTM E313-73)<WI(E313-73)> WI(-73)
a (Hunter) a Δa (Hunter) da WI(Hunter) WI(Hunt.)
b (Hunter) b Δb (Hunter) db WI(TAUBE)Ê WI(TAUBE)
WI(STENSBY)Ê WI(ST.)
[Color Difference Equation]
Instrument WI(BERGER)Ê WI(BERG.)
display WI(ASTM E313-98)(C)Ê<WI(E313-98)(C)>
ΔE*ab dE*ab WI(ASTM E313-98)(D50)Ê<WI(E313-98)(D50)> WI(-96)
CMC(l:c) CMC(l:c) WI(ASTM E313-98)(D65)Ê<WI(E313-98)(D65)>
ΔL-CMC dL-CMC WI(Ganz)Ê WI(Ganz)
ΔC-CMC dC-CMC Tint(CIE)Ê Tint(CIE)
ΔH-CMC dH-CMC Tint(ASTM E313-98)(C)Ê<Tint(E313-98)(C)>
ΔE*94(CIE 1994)<ΔE*94> dE*94 Tint(ASTM E313-98)(D50)Ê<Tint(E313-98)(D50)> Tint_ASTM
ΔL-ΔE*94(CIE 1994)<ΔL-ΔE*94> dL-dE*94 Tint(ASTM E313-98)(D65)Ê<Tint(E313-98)(D65)>
ΔC-ΔE*94(CIE 1994)<ΔC-ΔE*94> dC-dE*94 Tint(Ganz)Ê Tint(Ganz)
ΔH-ΔE*94(CIE 1994)<ΔH-ΔE*94> dH-dE*94 YI(ASTM D1925)<YI(D1925)> YI(D1925)
ΔE00(CIE 2000)<ΔE00> dE00 YI(ASTM E313-73)<YI(E313-73)> YI(-73)
ΔL’-ΔE00(CIE 2000)<ΔL’-ΔE00> dL’-dE00 YI(ASTM E313-98)(C)Ê<YI(E313-98)(C)>
YI(-96)
ΔC’-ΔE00(CIE 2000)<ΔC’-ΔE00> dC’-dE00 YI(ASTM E313-98)(D65)Ê<YI(E313-98)(D65)>
ΔH’-ΔE00(CIE 2000)<ΔH’-ΔE00> dH’-dE00 YI(DIN 6167)(C)Ê
YI(DIN)
ΔEab(Hunter) dEab YI(DIN 6167)(D65)Ê
ΔE99 dE99 WB(ASTM E313-73)<WB(E313-73)> B(E313-73)
FMC2Ê FMC2 Brightness (TAPPI T452)Ê<Brightness (TAPPI)> Bright(T)
ΔL(FMC2)Ê dL(FMC2) Brightness (ISO 2470)Ê<Brightness (ISO)> Bright(I)
ΔCr-g(FMC2)Ê dCr-g Density B(ISO Status A)Ê<Density B(A)> StatusA_B
ΔCy-b(FMC2)Ê dCy-b Density G(ISO Status A)Ê<Density G(A)> StatusA_G
NBS100Ê NBS100 Density R(ISO Status A)Ê<Density R(A)> StatusA_R
NBS200Ê NBS200 Density B(ISO Status T)Ê<Density B(T)> StatusT_B
ΔEc(degree)(DIN 6175-2) dEc(deg.) Density G(ISO Status T)Ê<Density G(T)> StatusT_G
ΔEp(degree)(DIN 6175-2) dEp(deg.) Density R(ISO Status T)Ê<Density R(T)> StatusT_R
Rx(C)Ê
Rx(D65)Ê Rx
Rx(A)Ê
Functions

Ry(C)Ê
Other

Ry(D65)Ê Ry
Ry(A)Ê
Rz(C)Ê
Rz(D65)Ê Rz
Rz(A)Ê
Standard Depth (ISO 105.A06)Ê<Standard Depth> Std.Depth
< > Signifies abbreviated version used within this software.
Items marked with Ê are supported only by SpectraMagic NX
Professional Edition.

198
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Instrument Instrument
[Index Difference] [Special]
display display
ΔWI(CIE 1982)<ΔWI(CIE)> dWI(CIE) 8-degree gloss 8gloss
ΔWI(ASTM E313-73)<ΔWI(E313-73)> dWI(-73) User Equation 1 User Eq.1
ΔWI(Hunter) dWI(Hunt.) User Equation 2 User Eq.2
ΔWI(TAUBE)Ê dWI(TAUBE) User Equation 3 User Eq.3
ΔWI(STENSBY)Ê dWI(ST.) User Equation 4 User Eq.4
ΔWI(BERGER)Ê dWI(BERG.) User Equation 5 User Eq.5
ΔWI(ASTM E313-98)(C)Ê<ΔWI(E313-98)(C)> User Equation 6 User Eq.6
ΔWI(ASTM E313-98)(D50)Ê<ΔWI(E313-98)(D50)> dWI(-96) User Equation 7 User Eq.7
ΔWI(ASTM E313-98)(D65)Ê<ΔWI(E313-98)(D65)> User Equation 8 User Eq.8
ΔWI(Ganz)Ê dWI(Ganz)
Tint diff. (CIE)Ê dTint(CIE)
Tint diff. (ASTM E313-98)(C)Ê<Tint diff. (E313-98)(C)>
Tint diff. (ASTM E313-98)(D50)Ê<Tint diff. (E313-98)(D50)> dTint_ASTM
Tint diff. (ASTM E313-98)(D65)Ê<Tint diff. (E313-98)(D65)>
Tint diff. (Ganz)Ê dTint(Ganz)
ΔYI(ASTM D1925)<ΔYI(D1925)> dYI(D1925)
ΔYI(ASTM E313-73)<ΔYI(E313-73)> dYI(-73)
ΔYI(ASTM E313-98(C)Ê<ΔYI(E313-98)(C)>
dYI(-96)
ΔYI(ASTM E313-98)(D65)Ê<ΔYI(E313-98)(D65)>
ΔYI(DIN 6167(C)Ê
dYI(DIN)
ΔYI(DIN 6167)(D65)Ê
ΔWB(ASTM E313-73)<ΔWB(E313-73)> dB(E313-73)
Brightness diff. (TAPPI T452)Ê<Brightness diff. (TAPPI)> dBright(T)
Brightness diff. (ISO 2470)Ê<Brightness diff. (ISO)> dBright(I)
Density diff. B(ISO Status A)Ê<Density diff. B(A)> dStatusA_B
Density diff. G(ISO Status A)Ê<Density diff. G(A)> dStatusA_G
Density diff. R(ISO Status A)Ê<Density diff. R(A)> dStatusA_R
Density diff. B(ISO Status T)Ê<Density diff. B(T)> dStatusT_B
Density diff. G(ISO Status T)Ê<Density diff. G(T)> dStatusT_G
Density diff. R(ISO Status T)Ê<Density diff. R(T)> dStatusT_R
ΔRx(C)Ê
ΔRx(D65)Ê dRx
ΔRx(A)Ê
ΔRy(C)Ê
ΔRy(D65)Ê dRy
ΔRy(A)Ê
ΔRz(C)Ê
ΔRz(D65)Ê dRz
ΔRz(A)Ê
Std. Depth diff. (ISO 105.A06)Ê<Std. Depth diff.> dStd.Depth
Stain Test (ISO 105.A04E)(C)Ê<Stain Test (C)>
Stain Test
Stain Test (ISO 105.A04E)(D65)Ê<Stain Test (D65)>
Stain Test Rating (ISO 105.A04E)(C)Ê<Stain Test Rating (C)>
Stain TestR
Stain Test Rating (ISO 105.A04E)(D65)Ê<Stain Test Rating (D65)>
Grey Scale (ISO 105.A05)(C)<Grey Scale (C)>
GreyScale
Grey Scale (ISO 105.A05)(D65)<Grey Scale (D65)>
Grey Scale Rating (ISO 105.A05)(C)<Grey Scale Rating (C)>
GreyScaleR
Grey Scale Rating (ISO 105.A05)(D65)<Grey Scale Rating (D65)>
K/S Strength (Difference Comparison) (dE*)(C)<K/S Strength (dE*)(C)>
K/S St_dE*
K/S Strength (Difference Comparison) (ΔE*)(D65)<K/S Strength (ΔE*)(D65)>
K/S Strength (Difference Comparison) (ΔL*)(C)<K/S Strength (ΔL*)(C)>
K/S St_dL*
K/S Strength (Difference Comparison) (ΔL*)(D65)<K/S Strength (ΔL*)(D65)>
K/S Strength (Difference Comparison) (ΔC*)(C)<K/S Strength (ΔC*)(C)>
K/S St_dC*
K/S Strength (Difference Comparison) (ΔC*)(D65)<K/S Strength (ΔC*)(D65)>
K/S Strength (Difference Comparison) (ΔH*)(C)<K/S Strength (ΔH*)(C)>
K/S St_dH*
K/S Strength (Difference Comparison) (ΔH*)(D65)<K/S Strength (ΔH*)(D65)>
K/S Strength (Difference Comparison) (Δa*)(C)<K/S Strength (Δa*)(C)>
K/S St_da*
K/S Strength (Difference Comparison) (Δa*)(D65)<K/S Strength (Δa*)(D65)>
Functions

K/S Strength (Difference Comparison) (Δb*)(C)<K/S Strength (Δb*)(C)>

K/S St_db*
Other

K/S Strength (Difference Comparison) (Δb*)(D65)<K/S Strength (Δb*)(D65)>

K/S Strength (All Wavelengths)<K/S Strength (Apparent)> K/S_Ap.
K/S Strength (User Wavelength)<K/S Strength (User)> K/S_U400
K/S Strength (Wavelength of maximum absorption)<K/S Strength (Max)> K/S_MAX
Wavelength of K/S Strength (Wavelength of maximum absorption) K/S_MAX nm
NC#(C)Ê
NC#
NC#(D65)Ê
NC# Grade (C)Ê
NC# Grade
NC# Grade (D65)Ê < > Signifies abbreviated version used within
Ns(C)Ê this software.
Ns
Ns(D65)Ê
Ns Grade (C)Ê Items marked with Ê are supported only by
Ns Grade
Ns Grade (D65)Ê SpectraMagic NX Professional Edition.

199
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.25 Job Settings

• This function is available only for the CM-25cG (firmware ver. 1.2 or later) and CM-26dG/26d/25d.
The Job function enables workflows including texts and pictures to be predefined and stored on the
instrument. These workflows can then be selected on the instrument and used for standalone
measurement work. Up to 5 jobs can be stored on the instrument.

2.10.25-a Creating/Editing a Job

Jobs can be defined with or without an instrument connected.
When editing a job with an instrument connected, the edited job is saved back to the instrument when
the OK button is pressed. When editing a job without an instrument connected, the edited job can be
stored to a file for later uploading to the instrument when connected.

■ Creating/Editing a job with an instrument connected

• When performing Job settings, communication via USB is recommended. Although Job settings can
be performed via Bluetooth communication, it will take a longer time to transfer settings and
images between the computer and instrument.
1. Select Instrument - Standalone Configuration - Job Setting.
The list of jobs currently stored on the instrument will be
read and the Job List dialog box will be shown.
• The names in the Job List dialog are the names which
are shown in the instrument’s Job screen.
2. Select the row for the job to be edited, and click the Edit
button. The Job Settings dialog box will open. If job
settings exist for the selected job, those settings will be
read from the instrument and shown.
Functions
Other

3. Make the necessary settings in the Job Settings dialog box. See Job Settings dialog box operations
on page 203.
• Settings can also be loaded from a file by clicking the Load button and specifying the file. See
page 204.

200
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

4. After all settings have been completed, click the OK button. A confirmation message will appear,
asking whether to write the changes.
• When saving a job to a CM-26dG/26d/25d with firmware version earlier than 1.2, if target data
already exist in the instrument for the target numbers set in the job, a message asking whether
to overwrite the existing instrument target data will be shown. Click the Yes button to overwrite
the existing instrument target data or click the Cancel button to cancel writing the job to the
instrument.
For instruments with firmware version 1.2 or later, a separate memory region for job target data
is provided so that overwriting of non-job target data does not occur.
• Settings can be saved to a file if desired by clicking the Save button and specifying the file name
and location.
• To close the Job Settings dialog box without saving the job to the instrument, click the Cancel
button instead of the OK button.
5. Click the Yes button to write the changes to the instrument and close the Job Settings dialog box.
6. Click the Close button in the Job List dialog box to close the dialog box.

■ Creating/Editing a job without an instrument connected

• This function is not available in demo mode.
1. Select Instrument - Standalone Configuration - Job Setting.
The Job Settings (Select Instrument) dialog box will be
shown.
2. Select the instrument for which the job will be created from
the drop-down list and click the OK button. The Job Settings
dialog box will open.
• Only settings available for the selected instrument will
be available in Job Settings dialog box.

Functions
Other

3. Make the necessary settings in the Job Settings dialog box. See Job Settings dialog box operations
on p. 203.

201
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

• Settings can also be loaded from a file by clicking the Load button and specifying the file. See
page E206.
4. After all settings have been completed, save the settings to a file by clicking the Save button and
specifying the file name and location.
5. Click the Cancel button to close the Job Settings dialog box.

■ Deleting a job from the instrument

1. With the instrument connected, select Instrument - Standalone Configuration - Job Setting. The list of
jobs currently stored on the instrument will be read and the Job List dialog box will be shown.
• The names in the Job List dialog are the names which are shown in the instrument’s Job screen.
2. Select the row for the job to be deleted, and click the Delete button. A confirmation message will
appear.
• It is not possible to select multiple jobs at once.
3. Click the Yes button to complete the deletion of the job from the instrument.
• To cancel deletion of the job, click the No button.
Functions
Other

202
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

2.10.25-b Job Settings dialog box operations

Functions
Other

203
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Loading a job file

A previously saved job file containing job settings can be loaded by following the procedure below.
1. Click the Load button. The Open dialog box for opening a job file (extension: *.m25cGJob for CM-
25cG, *.m26job for CM-26dG/26d/25d) will be shown.
2. Browse to the job file to be opened, and click the Open button. The selected job file will be opened
and the job settings loaded from the file will be shown in the Job Settings dialog box.
• If the file was created using a different model or an instrument with newer firmware than the
connected instrument, an error message may appear and the file may not be loaded in some
cases.

■ Saving a job file

The settings and target data set for the job currently open in the Job Settings dialog box can be saved to
a file for later use.
1. Click the Save button. The Save As dialog box for saving a job file (extension: *.m25cGJob for CM-
25cG, *.m26job for CM-26dG/26d/25d) will be shown.
2. Browse to the location to which the job file should be saved, input the desired job file name, and
click the Save button. The settings and target data set for the job currently open in the Job Settings
dialog box will be saved to the specified file.

■ Setting the Job Name

Click in the Job Name textbox area and input the desired name for the job. This name will be shown in
the Job screen of the instrument.
• Up to 20 alphanumeric characters can be used for the name.
Functions
Other

204
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Image Settings
The Image Settings section is used to manage the images which can be selected when specifying the
settings for an Operation step.

• Up to 10 images can be specified, and the same image can be used for multiple steps.

■ Specifying images to be available for use in Operation steps

1. In the Image Settings section, select the desired row in the table.
• If an image has already been set for that row, an image preview will be shown.
2. Click the Edit button in the Image Settings section.
The Job Settings (Image Settings) dialog box will
be shown.
• If an image was already set for the row selected
in step 1, the information and preview for that
image will be shown in the Job Settings (Image
Settings) dialog box
3. Click the Browse button. The Open dialog box for
selecting images will be shown.
4. Browse to the desired bmp, jpg, or png image file
and click Open to select the image and close the
dialog.
• The image will be automatically resized, and
the path shown in File Name will change to the
location of the resized file.
If Keep Aspect Ratio is checked, the image will
be resized and centered while keeping the
height-to-width ratio of the original image.
If Keep Aspect Ratio is not checked, the image
will be stretched to 240 (w) x 128 (h).
5. Input the desired Image Name.
Functions

6. Click the OK button. The set or changed image settings will be shown in the Image Settings table.
Other

■ Deleting an image from the Image Settings table

1. In the Image Settings section, select the table row of the image to delete.
• A preview of the image will be shown to the right of the table.
• It is not possible to select multiple images at once.
2. Click the Delete button in the Image Settings section. A confirmation message will appear.
3. Click the Yes button to complete the deletion of the selected image from the Image Settings table.
• To cancel deletion of the image, click the No button.

205
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Step Settings
The Step Settings section is for managing the steps of a Job.

• Two types of steps are available:

Operation: For performing a measurement.
Result: For displaying the results for the most recent measurement taken in an Operation
step.
• Up to a maximum of 20 steps can be set for a job.
• The first step of a job must be an Operation step.
• When a step is selected in the Step Settings table, the Display Settings and Data Info will show the
settings for the selected step.

■ Adding a step
1. Click the Add button. A dialog box asking whether the step should be an Operation step or Result
step will appear.
2. Select the desired step type and click the OK button. The step will be added after the current last
step in the Step Settings table, and the Display Settings and Data Info sections will show the
available settings for the selected step type. The Edit button will change to the Done button.
• For the available settings for each section, see the following pages.
3. After all settings have been completed, click the Done button.
• To cancel adding a step, click the Step Settings section Cancel button instead of the Done
button. The step will not be added.

■ Editing an existing step

Functions

1. In the Step Settings table, select the step to edit. The current settings for the selected step will be shown
Other

in the Display Settings section and Data Info sections as read only, and the Edit button will be enabled.
2. Click the Edit button. The settings in the Display Settings section and Data Info sections will
become editable, and the Edit button will change to the Done button.
• It is not possible to change the step type between Operation and Result when editing a step.
• For the available settings for each section, see the following pages.
3. After all settings have been completed, click the Done button.
• To cancel editing a step, click the Step Settings section Cancel button instead of the Done
button. Any changes will not be saved.

206
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Copying a step
1. In the Step Settings table, select the step to copy. The current settings for the selected step will be
shown in the Display Settings section and Data Info sections as read only.
• It is not possible to select multiple steps at once.
2. Click the Copy button. The selected step will be copied and added after the current last step in the
Step Settings table, and the settings in the Display Settings section and Data Info sections will
become editable.
• For the available settings for each section, see the following pages.
3. After all settings have been completed, click the Done button.
• To cancel any changes made after copying the step, click the Step Settings section Cancel
button instead of the Done button. Any changes will not be saved.

■ Rearranging the order of steps

1. In the Step Settings table, select the step to move up or down.
• It is not possible to select multiple steps at once.
2. Click the Up button or Down button to move the step as desired. The step will be moved one row
each time a button is clicked.
• The Up button will be disabled when the selected step is the first step, and the Down button will
be disabled when the selected step is the last step.

■ Deleting a step
1. In the Step Settings table, select the step to delete.
• It is not possible to select multiple steps at once.
2. Click the Delete button in the Step Settings section. A confirmation message will appear.
3. Click the Yes button to complete the deletion of the selected step from the Step Settings table.
• To cancel deletion of the step, click the No button.

■ Protecting targets set for job

• Shown only when connected instrument is a CM-26dG/26d/25d with firmware version earlier than
1.2.
The targets set for the job are used for calculating color difference. If a set target is deleted, color
difference values based on that target will be shown as “---” in measurement results.
1. To protect the targets used in the job from being deleted accidentally, put a check in the checkbox
next to “Protect target data when writing job settings.” by clicking on it if the checkbox is empty.
The targets will be protected when the job is written to the instrument.
Functions
Other

• If this checkbox is not checked, whether or not a target is protected will be according to the
setting of the data protection function on the instrument.

■ Enabling user to select whether or not to repeat job at end of job

1. To enable the user to repeat a job, put a check in the checkbox next to “After the last step, display a
popup asking if you want to start job once again.” under the Step Settings table by clicking on it if
the checkbox is empty.
• Clicking on the checked checkbox will remove the check and the popup will not appear after the
last step when running the job.

207
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Operation step settings: Display Settings

Button Display:
The Prev (<<) and Next (>>) buttons in the instrument display are used to skip to the next Operation
step when running a job. To display the Prev (<<) and/or Next (>>) buttons in the instrument
display when this step is shown while running a job, put a check in the respective checkbox by
clicking on the checkbox if it is blank.
• Clicking a checked checkbox will remove the check.

Comment:
Input the comment to be shown in the instrument display for this step.
• Up to 100 alphanumeric characters can be input.

Image:
Click on the currently selected item in the pull-down list to open the list and select the image to be
shown in the instrument display for this step.
• Only images which have previously been set in the Image Settings section will be shown in the
drop-down list.
Functions
Other

208
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Operation step settings: Data Info

Target section:
Shows information related to the target set for this step.

Target No. (When connected instrument is a CM-26dG/26d/25d with firmware version earlier
than 1.2): The target number for the target stored in the instrument.
Target No. (for Step) (For instruments with firmware version 1.2 or later, or when creating/editing
a Job with no instrument connected): The step number in which the target will be used.

Select List ... button: Opens Job Settings (Target List) dialog for selecting the target to be used for
this step when calculating colorimetric difference values. See page 211.

Absolute: Enables absolute-value measurements. When checked, the Select List ... button will be
disabled and no target measurement conditions will be shown. The measurement conditions used
for measurements will be the measurement conditions set in the Sample section.

• The measurement conditions (Measurement Mode, Measurement Area, Specular Component,

and UV Settings) shown are those set for the selected target.

Sample section:
Shows information related to sample measurements for this step.
Sample Name:
Input the name to be attached to the measurement taken in this step.
• Up to 30 alphanumeric characters can be input.
Measurement Mode:
Click on the currently selected item in the pull-down list to open the list and select the
measurement mode to use for this step.
Functions
Other

Available items: Color & Gloss (CM-26dG, CM-25cG only)

Color
Gloss only (CM-26dG, CM-25cG only)

Measurement Area:
Click on the currently selected item in the pull-down list to open the list and select the
measurement area to use for this step.
Available items: MAV(8mm)
SAV(3mm) (CM-26dG, CM-26d, CM-25cG only)

209
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

Specular Component: (not shown for CM-25cG)

Click on the currently selected item in the pull-down list to open the list and select the specular
component setting to use for this step.
Available items: SCI
SCE
SCI+SCE
If “100% Full + 400nm cut” is selected for UV Settings, “SCI+SCE” cannot be selected.
UV Settings: (not shown for CM-25cG)
Click on the currently selected item in the pull-down list to open the list and select the UV setting to
use for this step.
Available items: 100% Full
400nm cut
UV Adjust
100% Full + 400nm cut
If “SCI+SCE” is selected for Specular Component, “100% Full + 400nm cut” cannot be selected.

Auto average times:

Set the number of measurements to be automatically taken and averaged when the measuring
button is pressed.
Settable range: 1 to 10
• Auto average times and Manual average times can be combined.

Manual average times:

Set the number of measurements to be taken and averaged for this step.
Settable range: 1 to 30
• Auto average times and Manual average times can be combined.
Functions
Other

210
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Job Settings (Target List) dialog

The Job Settings (Target List) dialog is opened by clicking the Select List ... button.

• If the connected instrument is a CM-26dG/26d/25d with firmware version earlier than 1.2, the
targets currently stored on the instrument will be read and shown in the list.
• If the connected instrument has firmware version 1.2 or later, the Source for getting target list
dropdown box will be active. Select the desired source and click View to read the targets and show
them in the list.
NX Active Document: The targets will be read from the currently active NX document.
Instrument: The targets will be read from the instrument.

Click on the circle next to the desired target so that it changes to a filled circle and then click the OK
button.
• Opacity targets cannot be set.
• The measurement conditions (Measurement Mode, Measurement Area, Specular Component,
and UV Settings) set for the selected target will be automatically set for the operation step.

If the connected instrument is a CM-26dG/26d/25d with firmware version earlier than 1.2:
• If no data exists in the instrument for the selected target number, measurement results
difference values will be shown as “---” in the instrument display.
• NX Active Document cannot be selected as the source.

If the connected instrument has firmware version 1.2 or later:

• When Instrument is selected, the list of targets read from the instrument will include the targets
in memory available for normal standalone use as well as job targets.
Functions
Other

• On instruments with firmware version 1.2 or later, target memory is arranged as follows:
Targets for normal standalone use: 1 to 1000
Job targets: 20 target spaces (one for each job step) per job.
CM-26dG/26d/25d:
Job 1: 1001 (Step 1 target) to 1020 (Step 20 target),
Job 2: 1021 (Step 1 target) to 1040 (Step 20 target),
etc.
CM-25cG:
Job 1: 2501 (Step 1 target) to 2520 (Step 20 target),
Job 2: 2521 (Step 1 target) to 2540 (Step 20 target),
etc.
211
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

• No target will be stored for a step and the memory space for that step will not be shown in
the list of targets in the following cases:
– If the step is a Result step.
– If “Absolute” for absolute-value measurements is checked.
For example, memory use for Job 2 with the following 6 steps on a CM-26dG would be as
follows:
Step Step type Target memory
Step 1 Operation step 1021: Target data for step 1
Step 2 Results step Not used, not shown
Step 3 Operation step with “Absolute” checked Not used, not shown
Step 4 Results step Not used, not shown
Step 5 Operation step 1025: Target data for step 5
Step 6 Results step Not used, not shown
Functions
Other

212
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Result step settings: Display Settings

Button Display:
The Prev (<<) and Next (>>) buttons in the instrument display are used to skip to the next Operation
step when running a job. To display the Prev (<<) and/or Next (>>) buttons in the instrument
display when this step is shown while running a job, put a check in the respective checkbox by
clicking on the checkbox if it is blank.
• Clicking a checked checkbox will remove the check.
Observer/Iluminant1, Observer/Illuminant2:
Click on the currently selected item in the pull-down list to open the list and select the observer/
illuminant combination to use for this step.
Available items: 2 degree/A 2 degree/F10 10 degree/F2
2 degree/C 2 degree/F11 10 degree/F6
2 degree/D50 2 degree/F12 10 degree/F7
2 degree/D65 2 degree/User 10 degree/F8
2 degree/ID50 10 degree/A 10 degree/F10
2 degree/ID65 10 degree/C 10 degree/F11
2 degree/F2 10 degree/D50 10 degree/F12
2 degree/F6 10 degree/D65 10 degree/User
2 degree/F7 10 degree/ID50 (None)
2 degree/F8 10 degree/ID65
• “(None)” is shown and can be selected only for Observer/Illuminant2.

Specular Component: (not shown for CM-25cG)

Click on the currently selected item in the pull-down list to open the list and select the specular
component setting to use for this step.
Available items: SCI
SCE
SCI+SCE
• Measurement results can be calculated and shown in the instrument display only for Specular
Component settings included in the Operation step for which results are being shown. For
Functions
Other

example, if the Operation step Specular Component setting was set to “SCI”, even if the Results
step Specular Component setting was set to “SCE” or “SCI+SCE”, the SCE results will be shown
as “---” in the instrument display.

213
 CHAPTER 2 : OPERATION GUIDE

■ Result step settings: Custom Item

1: to 7:
Click on the currently selected item in the pull-down list to open the list and select the item to be
shown in the instrument display for this step. The instrument display for this step will show the
items selected for 1: to 7: in a single screen.
Available items: (None) dY YI(ASTM D1925)
L* dZ dYI(ASTM D1925)
a* x Brightness(ISO 2470)
b* y Brightness diff.(ISO 2470)
dL* dx dE99o
da* dy Grey Scale*1
db* H 8 degree gloss*3
C* V WI(Ganz)*4
h C dWI(Ganz)*4
dC* dE*ab Tint(Ganz)*4
dH* CMC(l:c) Tint diff.(Ganz)*4
L(Hunter) dE*94(CIE 1994) UE1
a(Hunter) dE00 (CIE 2000) UC1
b(Hunter) dEab(Hunter) UE2
dL(Hunter) MI(DIN) UC2
da(Hunter) GU*2 UE3
db(Hunter) dGU*2 UC3
X WI(ASTM E313-73) K/S Strength(dE*)*5
Y dWI(ASTM E313-73) K/S Strength(Max Abs)*5
Z WI(CIE 1982) K/S Strength(Apparent)*5
Strength*1 dWI(CIE 1982) Staining ISO105-A04*5
Strength X *1
Tint (CIE) FMC2*5
Strength Y *1
Tint diff. (CIE) dL(FMC2)*5
Functions

Strength Z *1
YI(ASTM E313-73) dCr-g(FMC2)*5
Other

dX dYI(ASTM E313-73) dCr-b(FMC2)*5

• When “(None)” is selected, the item label will be shown as “---” in the instrument display and
the values will be blank.
*1 CM-26dG/26d/CM-25d only
*2 CM-26dG, CM-25cG (firmware ver. 1.2 or later) only
*3 CM-26d/25d only
*4 CM-26dG/26d with firmware Ver. 1.10 or later only. If Ganz&Griesser 4 or Ganz&Griesser 5 UV
calibration has not been performed for the instrument, values for WI(Ganz), dWI(Ganz),
Tint(Ganz), and Tint diff.(Ganz) will be shown as “---”.
*5 CM-26dG/26d/CM-25d with firmware Ver. 1.2 or later only
214
CHAPTER 3
GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

Spectral
Object
Graph
3.1 Spectral Graph Object................................................................. 215

Graph (L*a*b,
Hunter Lab)

Absolute
Object
3.1.1 Overview ......................................................................................215
3.1.2 Features ........................................................................................215
3.1.3 Right-click Menu ..........................................................................216
3.1.4 Setting Properties ........................................................................216

Color Difference
(ΔL*Δa*Δb*, ΔL
Δa Δb) Object
3.2 Absolute Graph (L*a*b, Hunter Lab) Object............................. 224

Graph
3.2.1 Overview ......................................................................................224
3.2.2 Features ........................................................................................224
3.2.3 Right-click Menu ..........................................................................225

Diagram

xy Chro-
maticity
3.2.4 Setting Properties ........................................................................225
3.3 Color Difference Graph (ΔL*Δa*Δb*, ΔL Δa Δb) Object............. 232
3.3.1 Overview ......................................................................................232

(ΔL*Δa*Δb*)
3D Graph
3.3.2 Features ........................................................................................232
3.3.3 Right-click Menu ..........................................................................233
3.3.4 Setting Properties ........................................................................233

Two-axis
Graph
3.4 xy Chromaticity Diagram............................................................ 240
3.4.1 Overview ......................................................................................240
3.4.2 Features ........................................................................................240

Data List
Object
3.4.3 Right-click Menu ..........................................................................241
3.4.4 Property ........................................................................................241

Trend Chart/
Histogram
3.5 3D Graph (ΔL*Δa*Δb*) ................................................................ 248

Object
3.5.1 Overview ......................................................................................248
3.5.2 Features ........................................................................................248
3.5.3 Right-click Menu ..........................................................................249

Object
Image
3.5.4 Setting Properties ........................................................................249
3.6 Two-axis Graph............................................................................. 257

Label Object
3.6.1 Overview ......................................................................................257

Numeric
3.6.2 Features ........................................................................................257
3.6.3 Right-click Menu ..........................................................................258
3.6.4 Setting Items ................................................................................259

Object

String
3.6.5 Setting Properties ........................................................................259

Label
3.7 Data List Object ........................................................................... 264
3.7.1 Overview ......................................................................................264 Pseudo
Object
Color

3.7.2 Setting Properties ........................................................................264

3.8 Trend Chart/Histogram Object ................................................... 265
Line Graph
Object

3.8.1 Overview ......................................................................................265

3.8.2 Features ........................................................................................265
3.8.3 Right-click Menu ..........................................................................266
Statistic
Object

3.8.4 Setting Items ................................................................................267

3.8.5 Setting Properties ........................................................................267
3.9 Image Object................................................................................ 275
Object
Line

3.9.1 Overview ......................................................................................275

3.9.2 Features ........................................................................................275
Rectangle
Object

3.9.3 Right-click Menu ..........................................................................275

3.9.4 Setting Items ................................................................................276
3.9.5 Setting Properties ........................................................................277
Operation of
the Canvas
Window in
Edit Mode

213
 3.10 Numeric Label Object.................................................................. 278
3.10.1 Overview ......................................................................................278
3.10.2 Features ........................................................................................278
3.10.3 Right-click Menu ..........................................................................278
Spectral

3.10.4 Setting Items ................................................................................279

Object
Graph

3.10.5 Setting Properties ........................................................................280

3.11 String Label Object...................................................................... 282
Graph (L*a*b,
Hunter Lab)
Absolute

Object

3.11.1 Setting Properties ........................................................................282

3.12 Pseudo Color Object ................................................................... 283
3.12.1 Right-click Menu ..........................................................................283
Color Difference

(ΔL*Δa*Δb*, ΔL
Δa Δb) Object

3.12.2 Setting Items ................................................................................284

Graph

3.12.3 Setting Properties ........................................................................285

3.13 Line Graph Object ....................................................................... 286
3.13.1 Overview ......................................................................................286
Diagram
xy Chro-
maticity

3.13.2 Features ........................................................................................286

3.13.3 Right-click Menu ..........................................................................286
3.13.4 Setting Items ................................................................................287
(ΔL*Δa*Δb*)

3.13.5 Setting Properties ........................................................................287

3D Graph

3.14 Statistic Object ............................................................................ 294

3.14.1 Right-click Menu ..........................................................................294
Two-axis

3.14.2 Setting Items ................................................................................295

Graph

3.14.3 Setting Properties ........................................................................296

3.15 Line Object ................................................................................... 297
Data List
Object

3.15.1 Setting Properties ........................................................................297

3.16 Rectangle Object ......................................................................... 298
Trend Chart/
Histogram

3.16.1 Setting Properties ........................................................................298

Object

3.17 Operation of the Canvas Window in Edit Mode ....................... 299

3.17.1 Right-click Menu ..........................................................................299
Object
Image

3.17.2 Illuminant Setting ........................................................................300

3.17.3 Group Setting............................................................................... 301
Label Object
Numeric

Object
String
Label
Pseudo

Object
Color
Line Graph
Object
Statistic
Object
Object
Line
Rectangle
Object
Operation of
the Canvas
Window in
Edit Mode

214
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.1 Spectral Graph Object

Spectral
Object
Graph
3.1.1 Overview
The spectral graph object is used to view spectral reflectance data. The horizontal axis of the graph rep-
resents the wavelength (nm) and the vertical axis represents the spectral reflectance (%).

Spectral Chart Spectral Chart

Delta-Reflectance (%)

Delta-Reflectance (%)
Reflectance (%)

Reflectance (%)

Wavelength (nm) Wavelength (nm)

Wavelength color bar

3.1.2 Features
• Plots a line graph of spectral reflectance.
• Indicates differences in reflectance (delta reflectance) of each wavelength.
• Displays a wavelength color bar.
• Graphs can be copied.
• Background, axis, and label colors are selectable.

215
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.1.3 Right-click Menu

Right-clicking a graphic object opens a context menu showing the available menu items. Table below
Spectral

Object
Graph

shows the menu items available for the spectral graph object.

Spectral Graph

Reflectance (%)

Wavelength (nm)

Right-click menu of spectral graph object

Menu Item Function

Show Grid Shows or hides the grid.
Show Delta Shows differences between target data and sample data at each wavelength.
Copy Copies the graphic object to the clipboard.
Group Shows a dialog box for specifying the attributes of the data to be plotted.
Property Shows the property dialog box for the graph.
See page 301 for the group attribute setting procedure.

3.1.4 Setting Properties

Selecting Property from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the properties of the
graph. The following six tabs are available for setting the properties of the spectral graph object.
1) Display
2) Wavelength
3) Data
4) Delta
5) Title
6) Miscellaneous
The following sections describe the details of these tabs.

216
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

1) Display tab

Spectral
Object
Graph
Show gridline
Select whether to show or hide gridlines.
Show delta
Select whether to show or hide the difference in reflectance between target data and sample data.
Note: When two or more pieces of sample data are selected, the results are overlapped on the graph.
Show wavelength color
Select whether to display the wavelength color bar below the wavelength axis.
Show all data
Select whether to show or hide all the data other than the selected data.
Show Data Number
Select whether to show or hide the data number shown on the list.
Font Specify the font of the number.
Color Specify the color of the number.
Data Format
Select the data format to display.
Selectable item: Reflectance (%), K/S, absorbance, Transparent (%)
Target - Color
Specify the display color of the target data.
Target - Outline
Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
outline cannot be specified.
Target - Marker
Specify -●-, -■-, X or - as the line type to indicate the target data.

217
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

Target - Size
Specify the size of the plot points of the target data (or the line width when - is selected as the line
type).
Spectral

Object
Graph

Sample - Selected - Color

Specify the display color of the sample data being selected in the list window.
Sample - Selected - Outline
Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
outline cannot be specified.
Sample - Selected - Circle Frame
Draw a circle around the plot points of the selected data.
Sample - Non-Selected - Color
Specify the display color of the sample data that is not being selected in the list window.
Sample - Non-Selected - Outline
Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
outline cannot be specified.
Sample - Marker
Specify -●-, -■-, X or - as the line type to indicate the sample data.
Sample - Size
Specify the size of the plot points of the sample data (or the line width when - is selected as the line
type).
See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

218
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

2) Wavelength tab

Spectral
Object
Graph
Scale - Auto [Minimum, Maximum, Major unit, Minor unit]
Specify whether to use the automatic setting of the scale for the data axis (horizontal axis). When
Auto is selected, these items are automatically determined according to the minimum and maximum
values of the data.
Scale - Value [Minimum, Maximum, Major unit, Minor unit]
Specify the minimum value, maximum value, major unit and minor unit of the scale for the data
axis.
Scale - Number of Decimals
Specify the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Scale - Color
Specify the scale color of the data axis.
Title - Show Title
Select whether to show or hide the title text of the wavelength axis.
Title - Text
Specify the label text appearing on the wavelength axis.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the label appearing on the data axis. Be sure to also specify the lan-
guage when specifying the font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify a label color for the data axis.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

219
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3) Data tab
Spectral

Object
Graph

Scale - Auto [Minimum, Maximum, Major unit, Minor unit]

Specify whether to use the automatic setting of the scale for the reflectance axis (horizontal axis).
When Auto is selected, these items are automatically determined according to the minimum and
maximum values of the data.
Scale - Value [Minimum, Maximum, Major unit, Minor unit]
Specify the minimum value, maximum value, major unit and minor unit of the scale for the reflec-
tance axis.
Scale - Number of Decimals
Specify the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Scale - Color
Specify the scale color of the reflectance axis.
Title - Show Title
Select whether to show or hide the title text of the data axis.
Title - Text
Specify the label text appearing on the data axis.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the label appearing on the reflectance axis. Be sure to also specify the
language when specifying the font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the label color for the reflectance axis.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

220
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

4) Delta tab

Spectral
Object
Graph
Scale - Auto [Minimum, Maximum, Major unit, Minor unit]
Specify whether to use the automatic setting of the scale for the delta-reflectance axis (vertical axis
on the right). When Auto is selected, these items are automatically determined according to the
minimum and maximum values of the data.
Scale - Value [Minimum, Maximum, Major unit, Minor unit]
Specify the minimum value, maximum value, major unit and minor unit of the scale for the delta-
reflectance axis.
Scale - Number of Decimals
Specify the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Scale - Color
Specify the scale color of the delta-reflectance axis.
Title - Show Title
Select whether to show or hide the title text of the delta-reflectance axis.
Title - Text
Specify the label text appearing on the delta data axis.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the label appearing on the delta-reflectance axis. Be sure to also
specify the language when specifying the font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the label color for the delta-reflectance axis.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

221
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

5) Title tab
Spectral

Object
Graph

Show title
Select whether to show or hide the title of the graph.
Title - Text
Specify the text for the graph title.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the graph title. Be sure to also specify the language when specifying
the font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the color of the graph title.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

222
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

6) Miscellaneous tab

Spectral
Object
Graph
Colors - Background
Specify the background color of the graphic object.
Transparent When this option is checked, the background is transparent.
Colors - Plot area
Specify the color to be used for the inside of the graph.
Transparent When this option is checked, the inside of the graph is transparent.
Colors - Border of plot area
Specify the border color of the graph.
Colors - Gridline
Specify the gridline color of the graph.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

223
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.2 Absolute Graph

(L*a*b, Hunter Lab) Object
Graph (L*a*b,
Hunter Lab)
Absolute

Object

3.2.1 Overview
The absolute graph object is used to view the absolute values under the L*a*b* or Hunter Lab color sys-
tem. The L* or L value is plotted on the left side of the object, and the a*-b* or a-b value is plotted on
the right side.
Depending on the plot type selected, the value of a*-b* or a-b, the value of a*-L* or a-L or the value of
b*-L* or b-L is plotted.
If tolerance is set using the SpectraMagic NX software, measurement data plot points are displayed in
the background color of the tolerance total judgment.

Lightness bar

3.2.2 Features
• Plots an absolute graph for the L*a*b* or Hunter Lab color system.
• Shows the lightness bar.
• Shows the pseudo color of the a*-b* color space (for the L*a*b* color system only).
• Graphs can be copied.
• Background, axis, and label colors are selectable.

224
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.2.3 Right-click Menu

Right-clicking a graphic object opens a context menu showing the available menu items. Table below
shows the menu items displayed for the absolute graph object.

Graph (L*a*b,
Hunter Lab)

Absolute
Object
Right-click menu of absolute graph object

Menu Item Function

Show Grid Shows or hides the grid.
Copy Copies the graphic object to the clipboard.
Illuminant Shows a dialog box for specifying the illuminant.
Group Shows a dialog box for specifying the attributes of the data to be plotted.
Plot Type Shows a dialog box for specifying a space to be drawn. Select one from “L*, a*-b*”
(or “L, a-b”), “a*-b*” (or “a-b”), “a*-L*” (or “a-L”) or “b*-L*” (or “b-L”).
Property Shows the property dialog box for the graph.
See page 300 for the illuminant setting procedure.
See page 301 for the group attribute setting procedure.

3.2.4 Setting Properties

Selecting Property from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the properties of the
graph. The following five tabs are available for setting the properties of the absolute graph object.
1) Display
2) L* or L (For a plot type of “L*, a*-b*” (or “L, a-b”) only)
3) a*-b*, a-b, a*-L*, a-L, b*-L* or b-L
4) Title
5) Miscellaneous
The following sections describe the details of these tabs.

225
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

1) Display tab
Graph (L*a*b,
Hunter Lab)
Absolute

Object

Show Gridline
Select whether to show or hide gridlines.
Show background image (L*a*b* color system only)
Select whether to show or hide the pseudo color of the a*-b* color space.
Show lightness bar (For a plot type of “L*, a*-b*” (or “L, a-b”) only)
Select whether to display the lightness bar for the L* or L axis.
Show all data
Select whether to show or hide all the data. If Show all data is not checked, the selected data is dis-
played.
Show Data Number
Select whether to show or hide the data number shown on the list.
Font Specify the font of the number.
Color Specify the color of the number.
Target - Color
Specify the display color of the target data.
Target - Outline
Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
outline cannot be specified.
Target - Marker
Specify ●, ■, X or + as the marker type for plotting the target data.
Target - Size
Specify the size of the plot points.

226
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

Sample - Selected - Color

Specify the display color of the sample data being selected in the list window.
Sample - Selected - Outline
Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
outline cannot be specified.

Graph (L*a*b,
Hunter Lab)

Absolute
Object
Sample - Selected - Circle Frame
Draw a circle around the plot points of the selected data.
Sample - Non-Selected - Color
Specify the display color of the sample data that is not being selected in the list window.
Sample - Non-Selected - Outline
Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
outline cannot be specified.
Sample - Marker
Specify ●, ■, X or + as the marker type to plot the sample data.
Sample - Size
Specify the size of the plot points.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

227
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

2) Lightness axis (L* or L) tab

Graph (L*a*b,
Hunter Lab)
Absolute

Object

Scale - Auto [Minimum, Maximum, Major unit, Minor unit]

Specify whether to use the automatic setting of the scale for the lightness axis. When Auto is
selected, these items are automatically determined according to the minimum and maximum values
of the data.
Scale - Value [Minimum, Maximum, Major unit, Minor unit]
Specify the minimum value, maximum value, major unit and minor unit of the scale for the lightness
axis.
Scale - Number of Decimals
Specify the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Scale - Color
Specify the scale color of the lightness axis.
Title - Show Title
Select whether to show or hide the title text of the lightness axis.
Title - Text
Specify the label text appearing on the lightness axis.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the label appearing on the lightness axis. Be sure to also specify the
language when specifying the font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the label color of the lightness axis.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

228
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3) Chromaticity axis (a*-b*, a-b, a*-L*, a-L, b*-L* or b-L) tab

Graph (L*a*b,
Hunter Lab)

Absolute
Object
Scale - Auto [Center, Max. range, Major unit, Minor unit]
Specify whether to use the automatic setting of the scale. When Auto is selected, these items are
automatically determined according to the minimum and maximum values of the data.
Scale - Center
Specify the coordinates of the center of the display area in the color space.
Scale - Max. range
Specify the distance (maximum range) from the center in order to limit the display area.
Scale - Value [Major unit, Minor unit]
Specify the major and minor units of the scale.
Scale - Number of Decimals
Specify the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Scale - Color
Specify the scale color.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the label text. Be sure to also specify the language when specifying
the font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the label color.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

229
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

4) Title tab
Graph (L*a*b,
Hunter Lab)
Absolute

Object

Show title
Select whether to show or hide the title of the graph.
Title - Text
Specify the text for the graph title.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the graph title. Be sure to also specify the language when specifying
the font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the color of the graph title.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

230
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

5) Miscellaneous tab

Graph (L*a*b,
Hunter Lab)

Absolute
Object
Colors - Background
Specify the background color of the graphic object.
Transparent When this option is checked, the background is transparent.
Colors - Plot area
Specify the color to be used for the inside of the graph. The color can be changed only when “Show
background image” in the “Display” tab on page 226 is not checked.
Transparent When this option is checked, the inside of the graph is transparent.
Colors - Border of plot area
Specify the border color of the graph.
Colors - Gridline
Specify the gridline color of the graph.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

231
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.3 Color Difference Graph

(ΔL*Δa*Δb*, ΔL Δa Δb) Object
3.3.1 Overview
The color difference graph object is used to view the color difference values under the L*a*b* or
Color Difference

(ΔL*Δa*Δb*, ΔL

Hunter Lab color system. The ΔL* or ΔL value is plotted on the left side of the object, and the Δa*-Δb*
Δa Δb) Object
Graph

or Δa-Δb value is plotted on the right side. Depending on the plot type selected, the value of Δa*-Δb* or
Δa-Δb, the value of Δa*-ΔL* or Δa-ΔL or the value of Δb*-ΔL* or Δb-ΔL is plotted. The constant hue
locus and constant chroma locus for the target data can also be drawn. The tolerance of the color
difference can be displayed.
If tolerance is set using the SpectraMagic NX software, measurement data plot points are displayed in
the background color of the tolerance total judgment.
The ellipse displayed as a tolerance is shown for reference purposes. If the target has a low saturation, in
particular, the shape of the tolerance ellipse for CMC, ΔE*94, and ΔE*00 will be a little different from
the actual calculated value. Consequently, the sample data may be plotted within the ellipse even when
it fails judgment, or it may be plotted out of the ellipse even when it passes judgment.

Color Difference Graph Origin point

direction

Constant hue locus

Hue color

Constant chroma
locus

3.3.2 Features
• Plots a color difference graph for the L*a*b* or Hunter Lab color system.
• Indicates the tolerances of color differences [Box tolerance, color difference equation (ΔE*ab,
CMC, ΔE*94, ΔE*00)].
• Draws the constant hue locus and constant chroma locus (for ΔL*Δa*Δb* only).
• Shows the hue color display.
• Graphs can be copied.
• Background, axis, and label colors are selectable.

232
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.3.3 Right-click Menu

Right-clicking a graphic object opens a context menu showing the available menu items. Table below
shows the menu items displayed for the color difference graph object.

Color Difference Graph

Color Difference
(ΔL*Δa*Δb*, ΔL
Δa Δb) Object

Graph
Right-click menu of color difference graph (ΔL*a*b*) object

Menu Item Function

Show Grid Shows or hides the grid.
Show Tolerance Shows or hides the tolerance values.
Master Target Switches the master target between always being located at the origin point and
always not being located at the origin point.
Copy Copies the graphic object to the clipboard.
Illuminant Shows a dialog box for specifying the illuminant.
Group Shows a dialog box for specifying the attributes of the data to be plotted.
Plot Type Shows a dialog box for specifying a space to be drawn. Select one from “ΔL*,
Δa*-Δb*” (or “ΔL, Δa-Δb”), “Δa*-Δb*” (or “Δa-Δb”), “Δa*-ΔL*” (or “Δa-ΔL”) or
“Δb*-ΔL*” (or “Δb-ΔL”).
Property Shows the property dialog box.
See page 300 for the illuminant setting procedure.
See page 301 for the group attribute setting procedure.

3.3.4 Setting Properties

Selecting Property from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the properties of the
graph. The following five tabs are available for setting the properties of the color difference graph object.
1) Display
2) ΔL* or ΔL (For a plot type of “ΔL*, Δa*-Δb*” (or “ΔL, Δa-Δb”) only)
3) Δa*-Δb*, Δa-Δb, Δa*-ΔL*, Δa-ΔL, Δb*-ΔL* or Δb-ΔL
4) Title
5) Miscellaneous
The following sections describe the details of these tabs.

233
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

1) Display tab
Color Difference

(ΔL*Δa*Δb*, ΔL
Δa Δb) Object
Graph

Show Gridline
Select whether to show or hide gridlines.
Show Tolerances
Select whether to show or hide the tolerances. When two or more pieces of sample data are selected,
no tolerances are displayed even if this option is checked.
Show Constant Hue Locus (Only for ΔL*Δa*Δb*)
Select whether to show or hide the constant hue locus.
Show Constant Chroma Locus (Only for ΔL*Δa*Δb*)
Select whether to show or hide the constant chroma locus.
Show Hue Color (Only for ΔL*Δa*Δb*)
Select whether to show or hide the hue color display. The hue color display is shown by the arrow-
heads in four colors indicating the hue direction at the four sides of the color difference graph. The
green arrow indicates the -a* direction, the red arrow the +a* direction, the blue arrow the -b* direc-
tion, and the yellow arrow the +b* direction.
Show Master target Tolerances
Select whether to show or hide the tolerance specified for the master target.
Show Projection Tolerance
Select whether to show or hide additional ellipse showing projection of tolerance ellipse onto graph
plane.
Show all data
Select whether to show or hide all the data. If Show all data is not checked, the selected data is dis-
played.
Show Data Number
Select whether to show or hide the data number shown on the list.
Font Specify the font of the number.
Color Specify the color of the number.

234
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

Target - Color
Specify the display color of the target data.
Target - Outline
Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
outline cannot be specified.
Target - Marker
Specify ●, ■, X or + as the marker type for plotting the target data.

Color Difference
(ΔL*Δa*Δb*, ΔL
Δa Δb) Object
Target - Size

Graph
Specify the size of the plot points.
Sample - Selected - Color
Specify the display color of the sample data being selected in the list window.
Sample - Selected - Outline
Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
outline cannot be specified.
Sample - Selected - Circle Frame
Draw a circle around the plot points of the selected data.
Sample - Non-Selected - Color
Specify the display color of the sample data that is not being selected in the list window.
Sample - Non-Selected - Outline
Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
outline cannot be specified.
Sample - Marker
Specify ●, ■, X or + as the marker type for plotting the sample data.
Sample - Size
Specify the size of the plot points.
See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

235
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

2) Lightness axis (ΔL* or ΔL) tab

Color Difference

(ΔL*Δa*Δb*, ΔL
Δa Δb) Object
Graph

Scale - Auto [Minimum, Maximum, Major unit, Minor unit]

Specify whether to use the automatic setting of the scale for the lightness axis. When Auto is
selected, these items are automatically determined according to the minimum and maximum values
of the data.
Scale - Value [Minimum, Maximum, Major unit, Minor unit]
Specify the minimum value, maximum value, major unit and minor unit of the scale for the lightness
axis.
Scale - Number of Decimals
Specify the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Scale - Color
Specify the scale color of the lightness axis.
Title - Show Title
Select whether to show or hide the title text of the lightness axis.
Title - Text
Specify the label text appearing on the lightness axis.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the label appearing on the lightness axis. Be sure to also specify the
language when specifying the font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the label color of the lightness axis.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

236
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3) Chromaticity axis (Δa*-Δb*, Δa-Δb, Δa*-ΔL*, Δa-ΔL, Δb*-ΔL* or Δb-ΔL)

tab

Color Difference
(ΔL*Δa*Δb*, ΔL
Δa Δb) Object

Graph
Scale - Auto [Center, Max. range, Major unit, Minor unit]
Specify whether to use the automatic setting of the scale. When Auto is selected, these items are
automatically determined according to the minimum and maximum values of the data.
Scale - Center
Specify the coordinates of the center of the display area in the color space.
Scale - Max. range
Specify the distance (maximum range) from the center in order to limit the display area.
Scale - Value [Major unit, Minor unit]
Specify the major and minor units of the scale.
Scale - Number of Decimals
Specify the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Scale - Color
Specify the scale color.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the label text. Be sure to also specify the language when specifying
the font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the label color.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

237
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

4) Title tab
Color Difference

(ΔL*Δa*Δb*, ΔL
Δa Δb) Object
Graph

Show title
Select whether to show or hide the title of the graph.
Title - Text
Specify the text for the graph title.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the graph title. Be sure to also specify the language when specifying
the font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the color of the graph title.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

238
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

5) Miscellaneous tab

Color Difference
(ΔL*Δa*Δb*, ΔL
Δa Δb) Object

Graph
Colors - Background
Specify the background color of the graphic object.
Transparent When this option is checked, the background is transparent.
Colors - Plot area
Specify the color to be used for the inside of the graph.
Transparent When this option is checked, the inside of the graph is transparent.
Colors - Border of plot area
Specify the border color of the graph.
Colors - Gridline
Specify the gridline color of the graph.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

239
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.4 xy Chromaticity Diagram

3.4.1 Overview
The chromaticity diagram object is a graph to show the absolute values of xy.
The Y value is plotted on the left side of the object, and the values of x-y are plotted on the right side.
Also, when list items are set to the signal color index, they are plotted in the xy chromaticity diagram on
the right side of the object.
(Ê This function is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Professional Edtion only.)
Depending on the plot type selected, you can hide the Y value by selection an appropriate plot type.
Diagram
xy Chro-
maticity

3.4.2 Features
• Displays the absolute values of Yxy
• Shows a horseshoe-shaped color display of the x-y space
• The graph can be copied.
• The color of the graph can be specified (background color, axis color and label color).

240
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.4.3 Right-click Menu

Right-clicking a graphic object opens a context menu showing the menu items available.
Table below shows the menu items displayed for the chromaticity diagram object.

Diagram

xy Chro-
maticity
Right-click menu of chromaticity diagram object
Menu Item Function
Show Grid Shows or hides the grid.
Copy Copies the graphic object to the clipboard.
Illuminant Shows a dialog box for specifying the illuminant.
Group Shows a dialog box for specifying the attributes of the data to be plotted.
Plot Type Shows the dialog box for specifying a space to be drawn. Select to show or
hide the Y display.
Property Shows the property dialog box for the graph.
See page 301 for the group attribute setting procedure.

3.4.4 Property
Selecting Property from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the properties of the
graph.
The following tabs are available for setting the properties.
1) Display
2) Y
3) x-y
4) Title
5) Miscellaneous
The following sections describe the details of these tabs.

241
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

1) Display tab
Diagram
xy Chro-
maticity

Show Gridline
Select whether to show or hide gridlines.
Show all data
Select whether to show or hide all data of the list on the chromaticity diagram.
Show background image
Select whether to show or hide the pseudocolor of the x-y space.
Show blackbody locus
Select whether to show or hide the blackbody locus on the chromaticity diagram.
Show dominant wavelength
Select whether to show or hide the dominant wavelength line and label on the chromaticity diagram.
Show Data Number
Select whether to show or hide the data number shown on the list.
Font Specify the font of the number.
Color Specify the color of the number.
Target - Color
Specify the display color of the target data.
Target - Outline
Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
outline cannot be specified.
Target - Marker
Specify ●, ■ or X as the marker type for plotting the target data.
Target - Size
Specify the size of the plot points.

242
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

Sample - Selected - Color

Specify the display color of the sample data being selected in the list window.
Sample - Selected - Outline
Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
outline cannot be specified.
Sample - Selected - Circle Frame
Draw a circle around the plot points of the selected data.
Sample - Non-Selected - Color
Specify the display color of the sample data that is not being selected in the list window.
Sample - Non-Selected - Outline
Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the

Diagram

xy Chro-
maticity
outline cannot be specified.
Sample - Marker
Specify ●, ■ or X as the marker type for plotting the sample data.
Sample - Size
Specify the size of the plot points.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

243
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

2) Y axis tab
Diagram
xy Chro-
maticity

Scale - Auto [Minimum, Maximum, Major unit, Minor unit]

Specify whether to use the automatic setting of the scale for the Y axis. When Auto is selected, these
items are automatically determined according to the minimum and maximum values of the data.
Scale - Value [Minimum, Maximum, Major unit, Minor unit]
Specify the minimum value, maximum value, major unit and minor unit of the scale for the Y axis.
Scale - Number of Decimals
Specify the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Scale - Color
Specify the scale color of the Y axis.
Title - Show Title
Select whether to show or hide the title text of the Y axis.
Title - Text
Specify the label text appearing on the Y axis.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the label appearing on the Y axis. Be sure to also specify the language
when specifying the font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the label color of the Y axis.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

244
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3) Chromaticity axis (x-y) tab

Diagram

xy Chro-
maticity
Scale - Auto [Center, Max. range, Major unit, Minor unit]
Specify whether to use the automatic setting of the scale for the chromaticity axis. When Auto is
selected, these items are automatically determined according to the minimum and maximum values
of the data.
Scale - Center
Specify the coordinates of the center of the display area in the x-y space.
Scale - Max. range
Specify the distance (maximum range) from the center to determine the display area.
Scale - Value [Major unit, Minor unit]
Specify the major and minor intervals of the scales.
Scale - Number of Decimals
Specify the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Scale - Color
Specify the scale color of the chromaticity axis.
x Axis Title - Show Title/y Axis Title - Show Title
Select whether to show or hide the title text of the x-axis (y-axis).
x Axis Title - Text/y Axis Title - Text
Specify the title name of the x-axis (y-axis).
x Axis Title - Font/y Axis Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the label appearing on the chromaticity axis. Be sure to also specify
the type when specifying the font in the Font dialog box.
x Axis Title - Color/y Axis Title - Color
Specify the label color of the chromaticity axis.
See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

245
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

4) Title tab
Diagram
xy Chro-
maticity

Show title
Select whether to show or hide the title of the chart.
Title - Text
Specify the text for the chart title.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the chart title. Be sure to also specify the type when specifying the
font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the color of the chart title.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

246
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

5) Miscellaneous tab

Diagram

xy Chro-
maticity
Colors - Background
Specify the background color of the graphic object.
Transparent When this option is checked, the background is transparent.
Colors - Plot area
Specify the color to be used for the inside of the graph. The color can be changed only when “Show
background image” in the “Display tab” on page 242 is not checked.
Transparent When this option is checked, the inside of the graph is transparent.
Colors - Border of plot area
Specify the border color of the graph.
Colors - Gridline
Specify the gridline color of the graph.
Colors - Black body locus
Specify the color of the black body.
Colors- Dominant wavelength
Specify the color of the dominant wavelength line and label.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

247
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.5 3D Graph (ΔL*Δa*Δb*)

3.5.1 Overview
The 3D graph object is a graph to show an L*a*b* color space using a 3D space.
It shows the values of ΔL*, Δa* and Δb* as well as the tolerance of color difference, allowing a visual
check of whether each plot point is within the tolerance space.
For easier recognition of the space, the graph is shown as if it were lit from a certain angle.
You can rotate the 3D graph by holding down the space bar and moving the mouse (with the left button
held down). You can also zoom the 3D graph in or out by holding down the space bar and rotating the
mouse wheel forward or backward.
*The ellipse displayed as a tolerance is shown for reference purposes. If the target has a low saturation,
in particular, the shape of the tolerance ellipse for CMC, ΔE*94, and ΔE00 will be a little different from
the actual calculated value. Consequently, the sample data may be plotted within the ellipse even when
(ΔL*Δa*Δb*)
3D Graph

it fails judgment, or it may be plotted out of the ellipse even when it passes judgment.

3.5.2 Features
• Plots a color difference graph for the L*a*b* color space.
• Shows a wire frame representing the tolerances of color differences (cube, ellipsoid).
• Draws the constant hue locus and constant chroma locus.
• Shows the hue color display.
• 3D representation (axis rotation, zooming in/out, light direction setting)
• Graphs can be copied.
• Background, axis, and label colors are selectable.

248
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.5.3 Right-click Menu

Right-clicking a graphic object opens a context menu showing the available menu items.
The table below shows the menu items displayed for the 3D graph object.

(ΔL*Δa*Δb*)
3D Graph
Right-click menu of 3D graph (ΔL*Δa*Δb*) object

Menu Item Function

Show Grid Shows or hides the grid.
Show Tolerance Shows or hides the tolerance values.
Copy Copies the graphic object to the clipboard.
Illuminant Shows a dialog box for specifying the illuminant.
Group Shows a dialog box for specifying the attributes of the data to be plotted.
Property Shows the property dialog box.
See page 300 for the illuminant setting procedure.
See page 301 for the group attribute setting procedure.

3.5.4 Setting Properties

Selecting Property from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the properties of the
graph. The following six tabs are available for setting the properties of the 3D graph object.
1) Display
2) 3D
3) Direction
4) Axis
5) Title
6) Miscellaneous
The following sections describe the details of these tabs.

249
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

1) Display tab
(ΔL*Δa*Δb*)
3D Graph

Show Pseudo Color Plot

When this option is checked, the results of selecting Target - Color and Sample - Non-Selected -
Color are displayed with the pseudo color.
Show Gridline (L* - a*)
Select whether to show or hide gridlines.
Show Gridline (L* - b*)
Select whether to show or hide gridlines.
Show Gridline (a* - b*)
Select whether to show or hide gridlines.
Show Tolerance
Select whether to show or hide the tolerances.
Show Constant Hue Locus
Select whether to show or hide the constant hue locus.
Show Constant Chroma Locus
Select whether to show or hide the constant chroma locus.
Show Master Target Tolerance
Select whether to show or hide the tolerance specified for the master target.
Show All Data
Select whether to show or hide all the data.
Show Data Number
Select whether to show or hide the data number shown on the list.
Font Specify the font of the number.
Color Specify the color of the number.

250
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

Target - Color
Specify the display color of the target data.
Target - Transparency
Specify the transparency of the target data.
Target - Marker
Specify ●, ■, X or + as the marker type for plotting the target data.
Target - Size
Specify the size of the plot points.
Sample - Selected - Color
Specify the display color of the sample data being selected in the list window.
Sample - Selected - Transparency
Specify the transparency of the sample data that is being selected in the list window.

(ΔL*Δa*Δb*)
Sample - Selected - Marker

3D Graph
Specify ●, ■, X or + as the marker type for plotting the sample data.
Sample - Selected - Size
Specify the size of the plot points.
Sample - Non-Selected - Color
Specify the display color of the sample data that is not being selected in the list window.
Sample - Non-Selected - Transparency
Specify the transparency of the sample data that is not being selected in the list window.
Sample - Non-Selected - Marker
Specify ●, ■, X or + as the marker type for plotting the sample data that is not selected in the list
window.
Sample - Non-Selected - Size
Specify the size of the plot points of the sample data that is not selected in the list window.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

251
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

2) 3D tab
(ΔL*Δa*Δb*)
3D Graph

Tolerance - Diff.
Select the type of tolerance.
Selectable item: Box, color difference equation (ΔE*ab, CMC, ΔE*94, ΔE00, L*C*h, Free Ellipse)
Selection is available from a total of 14 types, 7 for the working target data and 7 for the master tar-
get data. Note, however, that the working target data is supported by the SpectraMagic NX Profes-
sional Edition only.
Tolerance - Settings - Color
Specify the color applied to the tolerance cube or ellipsoid.
Tolerance - Settings - Density
Specify the mesh density of the tolerance cube or ellipsoid.
Tolerance - Settings - Transparency
Specify the transparency of the tolerance cube or ellipsoid.
Tolerance - Settings - Wireframe
Select whether to show or hide the wire frame representing the tolerance cube or ellipsoid.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

252
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3) Direction tab

(ΔL*Δa*Δb*)
3D Graph
Light
Specify the direction of the light by moving the slider.
Light - Intensity
Specify the brightness of the light by moving the slider.

253
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

4) Axis tab
(ΔL*Δa*Δb*)
3D Graph

Scale - Value (Max range, Major unit, Minor unit)

Specify the maximum range, major unit and minor unit of the axis scale.
Scale - Number of Decimals
Specify the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Scale - Font
Specify the font to be used for the axis scale.
Be sure to also specify the language when specifying the font in the Font dialog box.
Scale - Color
Specify the color of the axis scale.
Title
Select whether to show or hide an axis title, and specify the title.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the label appearing on the axis.
Be sure to also specify the language when specifying the font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the label color of the lightness axis.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

254
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

5) Title tab

(ΔL*Δa*Δb*)
3D Graph
Show Title
Select whether to show or hide the title of the graph.
Title - Text
Specify the text for the graph title.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the graph title. Be sure to also specify the language when specifying
the font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the color of the graph title.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

255
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

6) Miscellaneous tab
(ΔL*Δa*Δb*)
3D Graph

Colors - Background
Specify the background color of the graphic object.
Colors - Axis
When this option is checked, the axis is displayed with the pseudo color.
When this option is not checked, you need to specify the color of the axis.
Colors - Grid Line
Specify the gridline color of the graph.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

256
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.6 Two-axis Graph

3.6.1 Overview
The two-axis graph object is a graph to indicate the relationship between two items such as colorimetric
data selected as list items. The relationship is indicated by specifying them on two axes.

Two-axis
Graph
3.6.2 Features
• Graphs can be copied.
• Background, axis, and label colors are selectable.

257
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.6.3 Right-click Menu

Right-clicking a graphic object opens a context menu showing the available menu items.
The table below shows the menu items displayed for the two-axis graph object.

Right-click menu of the two-axis graph object

Two-axis
Graph

Menu Item Function

Show Grid Shows or hides the grid.
Copy Copies the graphic object to the clipboard.
Group Shows a dialog box for specifying the attributes of the data to be plotted.
Item Shows a dialog box for specifying the target data used for judgement and the dis-
play style.
Property Shows the property dialog box.
See page 301 for the group attribute setting procedure.

258
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.6.4 Setting Items

Selecting Item from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the colorimetric data to be
displayed in the two-axis graph.

1) Axis tab

X-Axis, Y-Axis

Two-axis
Graph
Select the item to be displayed, such as colorimetric data.

3.6.5 Setting Properties

Selecting Property from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the properties of the
graph. The following five tabs are available for setting the properties of the two-axis graph object.
1) Display
2) X-axis specified in the Contents for 2-Axis dialog box
3) Y-axis specified in the Contents for 2-Axis dialog box
4) Title
5) Miscellaneous
The following sections describe the details of these tabs.

259
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

1) Display tab
Two-axis
Graph

Show Gridline
Select whether to show or hide gridlines.
Show all Data
Select whether to show or hide all the data.
Show Data Number
Select whether to show or hide the data number shown on the list.
Font Specify the font of the number.
Color Specify the color of the number.
Target - Color
Specify the display color of the target data.
Target - Outline
Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
outline cannot be specified.
Target - Marker
Specify ●, ■, X or + as the marker type for plotting the target data.
Target - Size
Specify the size of the plot points.
Sample - Selected - Color
Specify the display color of the sample data being selected in the list window.
Sample - Selected - Outline
Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
outline cannot be specified.
Sample - Non-Selected - Color
Specify the display color of the sample data that is not being selected in the list window.

260
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

Sample - Non-Selected - Outline

Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
outline cannot be specified.
Sample - Marker
Specify ●, ■, X or + as the marker type for plotting the sample data.
Sample - Size
Specify the size of the plot points.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

2) X-axis specified in the Contents for 2-Axis dialog box

3) Y-axis specified in the Contents for 2-Axis dialog box

Specify the properties of the axis for the item such as colorimetric data selected in the Contents for 2-
Axis dialog. The selected colorimetric data is shown as the name of the tab.

Two-axis
Graph
Scale - Auto (Maximum, Major unit, Minor unit)
Specify whether to use the automatic setting of the axis scale.
When Auto is selected, these items are automatically determined according to the minimum and
maximum values of the data.
Scale - Value (Minimum, Maximum, Major unit, Minor unit)
Specify the minimum value, maximum value, major unit and minor unit of the axis scale.
Scale - Number of Decimals
Specify the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Scale - Color
Specify the scale color of the lightness axis.

261
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

Title - Show Title

Select whether to show or hide an axis title.
Title - Text
Specify the axis title.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the title.
Be sure to also specify the language when specifying the font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the color of the title.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

4) Title tab
Two-axis
Graph

Show title
Select whether to show or hide the title of the graph.
Title - Text
Specify the text for the graph title.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the graph title.
Be sure to also specify the language when specifying the font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the color of the graph title.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

262
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

5) Miscellaneous tab

Two-axis
Graph
Colors - Background
Specify the background color of the graphic object.
Transparent When this option is checked, the background is transparent.
Colors - Plot area
Specify the color to be used for the inside of the graph. The color can be changed only when “Show
background image” in the “Display” tab on page 260 is not checked.
Transparent When this option is checked, the inside of the graph is transparent.
Colors - Border of plot area
Specify the border color of the graph.
Colors - Gridline
Specify the gridline color of the graph.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

263
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.7 Data List Object

3.7.1 Overview
The data list object is used to view the list data that is currently active in the list window.

3.7.2 Setting Properties

Selecting Property from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the properties of the
graph.
The following tab is available for setting the properties of the data list object.

1) Property tab
Data List
Object

All Data
When this option is checked, the contents that are the same as the list data are displayed. When “Fit
object to frame” is not checked, only the data that fits in the range of the data list object is displayed.
If All Data is not checked, only the selected data is displayed.
Fit object to frame
When this option is checked, all the list data is displayed within the range of the data list object.
Background - Transparent
Select whether to fill in the background.
Background - Color
Specify the background color of the graphic object.
Frame - None
Select whether to draw the frame of the graphic object.
Frame - Color
Specify the color of the frame of the graphic object.
Frame - Width
Specify the width of the frame of the graphic object.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

264
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.8 Trend Chart/Histogram Object

3.8.1 Overview
This object is used to view the trend of the specific color value and color difference value. The data of
the trend chart can also be displayed as a histogram or normal distribution.

Trend Chart Histgram

Frequency

Data No.

Trend Chart/
Histogram
Object
3.8.2 Features
• Plots a trend chart.
• Draws a histogram.
• Draws the normal distribution.
Shows statistics (average, standard deviation, maximum value, minimum value and range).

265
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.8.3 Right-click Menu

Right-clicking a graphic object opens a context menu showing the available menu items. Table below
shows the menu items displayed for the trend chart/histogram object.

Histgram

Frequency

Right-click menu of the trend chart/histogram object

Trend Chart/
Histogram

Menu Item Function

Object

Show Grid Shows or hides the grid.

Show Statistics Shows or hides the statistics.
Copy Copies the graphic object to the clipboard.
Group Shows a dialog box for specifying the attributes of the data to be plotted.
Item Shows a dialog box for specifying the target data used for judgement and
the display style.
Property Shows the property dialog box.
See page 301 for the group attribute setting procedure.

266
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.8.4 Setting Items

Selecting Items from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the target value to be
used for judgement for the trend chart/histogram and the display style.

1) Display Contents tab

Item:
Select the colorimetric data used for judgement.

2) Display Style tab

Trend Chart/
Histogram
Object
Display Style
Select either Trend Chart or Histogram.
When Histogram is selected, you can specify whether to display normal distribution.

3.8.5 Setting Properties

The following five tabs are available for setting the properties of the trend chart/histogram object.
1) Display
2) Judgement data axis (Example: ΔE)
3) Category axis
4) Title
5) Miscellaneous
The following sections describe the details of these tabs.

267
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

1) Display tab

Show Gridline
Select whether to show or hide gridlines.
Trend Chart/
Histogram

Show statistics
Object

Select whether to show or hide statistics (average, standard deviation, maximum value, minimum
value).
Show upper limit
Select whether to show or hide the upper limit of the tolerance in the trend chart.
Show lower limit
Select whether to show or hide the lower limit of the tolerance in the trend chart.
Show Target
Select whether to show or hide the target data in the trend chart.
Show all data
Select whether or not to show all data when using a line graph in the trend chart.
When not selected, some data including currently selected sample data are displayed.
Show Data Number
Select whether to show or hide the data number shown on the list.
Font Specify the font of the number.
Color Specify the color of the number.
Plot type
Specify a data plot method to be used in the trench chart such as a bar graph or line graph.
Target - Color
Specify a color to indicate the target data.
Sample - Selected - Color
Specify the display color of the sample data currently selected in the trend chart.

268
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

Sample - Selected - Outline

Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
outline cannot be specified.
Sample - Selected - Circle Frame
Draw a circle around the plot points of the selected data.
Sample - Non-Selected - Color
Specify the display color of the sample data that is not being selected in the list window.
Sample - Non-Selected - Outline
Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
outline cannot be specified.
Sample - Marker
Specify -●-, -■-, X or - as the line type to indicate the sample data.
Sample - Size
Specify the size (0 to 5) of the marker for plotting the sample data in the trend chart. (When 0 is
selected, the marker is not displayed.)
• When the selected list items are absolute values (e.g. L*, a*, b*, X, h, L), the upper and lower
limits are not displayed in the trend chart. Even if the option is checked, it is ignored.
• When the selected list items are color difference values (e.g. ΔL*, Δa*, Δb*, ΔX, ΔH*, ΔL), the
target data is always 0. Consequently, even when the option is checked, the target data will not
be displayed in the trend chart.

Trend Chart/
See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

Histogram
Object

269
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

2) Judgement data axis tab

Specify the properties of the colorimetric data axis selected in the Display Contents tab in the Item
properties. The selected colorimetric data is shown as the name of the tab.
Trend Chart/
Histogram

Scale - Auto [Minimum, Maximum, Major unit, Minor unit]

Object

Specify whether to use the automatic setting of the scale for the colorimetric data axis (vertical axis)
selected in the Display Contents tab in the Item properties. When Auto is selected, these items are
automatically determined according to the minimum and maximum values of the data.
Scale - Value [Minimum, Maximum, Major unit, Minor unit]
Specify the minimum value, maximum value, major unit and minor unit of the scale for the colori-
metric data axis selected in the Display Contents tab in the Item properties.
Scale - Number of Decimals
Specify the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Scale - Show 6 sigma range
Enable display of the range between -3σ to +3σ.
* “σ” represents the standard deviation.
Scale - Color
Specify the scale color of the judgement data axis.
Title - Show Title
Select whether to show or hide the title of the axis of the colorimetric data selected in the Display
Contents tab in the Item properties.
Title - Text
Specify the colorimetric data selected in the Display Contents tab in the Item properties.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the label appearing on the colorimetric data axis selected in the Dis-
play Contents tab in the Item properties. Be sure to also specify the language when specifying the
font in the Font dialog box.

270
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

Title - Color
Specify the label color of the colorimetric data axis selected in the Display Contents tab in the Item
properties.
Division - Number
Specify the number of divisions between the minimum and maximum values used for data sampling
in the histogram.
Division - Width [Cannot be edited.]
The width of a division used for data sampling in the histogram is displayed.
See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

Trend Chart/
Histogram
Object

271
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3) Category tab
Specify the properties of the data No. and axes to display a trend chart, and specify the properties of the
frequency axis to display a histogram.
Trend Chart/
Histogram

Scale - Color
Object

Specify the scale color.

Title - Show Title
Select whether to show or hide the label title.
Title - Text
Specify the label text.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the label text. Be sure to also specify the language when specifying
the font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the label color.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

272
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

4) Title tab

Show title
Select whether to show or hide the title of the chart.

Trend Chart/
Histogram
Title - Text

Object
Specify the text for the chart title.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the chart title. Be sure to also specify the language when specifying
the font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the color of the chart title.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

273
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

5) Miscellaneous tab

Colors - Background
Specify the background color of the graphic object.
Transparent When this option is checked, the background is transparent.
Trend Chart/
Histogram
Object

Colors - Plot area

Specify the color to be used for the inside of the chart.
Transparent When this option is checked, the inside of the graph is transparent.
Colors - Border of plot area
Specify the border color of the chart.
Colors - Gridline
Specify the gridline color of the chart.
See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

274
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.9 Image Object

3.9.1 Overview
The image object is used to view an image file in JPEG or BMP format. The measurement spot can be
marked on the image object. (See Fig. 6.)

3.9.2 Features
• Displays a specified image (JPEG or BMP format).
• Shows a marker at a measurement spot.
• Graphs can be copied.

3.9.3 Right-click Menu

Right-clicking a graphic object opens a context menu showing the available menu items. Table below
shows the menu items displayed for the image object.

Object
Image
Right-click menu of image object

Menu Item Function

Copy Copies the graphic object to the clipboard.
Item Shows a dialog box for specifying the data to be displayed.
Property Shows the property dialog box.

275
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.9.4 Setting Items

Selecting Items from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the type of the data to be
displayed.

1) Content Settings tab

Data Type
Select whether to display the target data or sample data.
Target
Object
Image

Display an image linked to the target data

Always use master target
Select whether to always show or hide the master target when the target is displayed.
Sample
Display an image linked to the sample data
Image File
Display an image specified by selecting the Select Image Path button.

276
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.9.5 Setting Properties

Selecting Property from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the properties. The
following tab is available for setting the properties of the image object.

1) Property tab

Measurement spot - Marker

Specify , or as the marker type.
Measurement spot - Size
Specify the size of the marker.

Object
Image

277
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.10 Numeric Label Object

3.10.1 Overview
The numeric label object is used to show colorimetric data or judgement items such as “Pass/Fail.”
When L* is selected as the data to be shown, for example, the object is displayed as shown in Fig. 7.

3.10.2 Features
• Displays colorimetric data.
• Displays judgement items (such as “Pass/Fail”).
• Shows tolerance

3.10.3 Right-click Menu

Right-clicking a numeric label object opens a context menu showing the available menu items. Table
below shows the menu items displayed for the numeric label object.

Right-click menu of numeric label object

Menu Item Function

Label Object

Group Shows a dialog box for specifying the attributes of the data to be plotted.
Numeric

Item Shows a dialog box for specifying the data to be displayed.

Property Shows the property dialog box.
See page 301 for the group attribute setting procedure.

278
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.10.4 Setting Items

Selecting Items from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the type and format of
the data to be displayed.

1) Content Settings tab

Data Type
Select whether to display the target data or sample data and choose the contents of the selected data.
Always use master target
Select whether to always show or hide the master target when the target is displayed.
Information

Label Object
Numeric
Use the combo box to specify the value to be displayed. Selectable items are: Data Number,
Observer, Primary, Secondary, Tertiary and Software Version.
Display Format (This option is displayed when Sample is selected for Data Type.)
Select the format of the display items when sample data is selected for Data Type.
Selectable item: Numeric value, assessment (result of the pass/fail judgement).
When Data Using List Colors is selected, the data is displayed using the character color specified on
the Judgement tab displayed by selecting Data - Judgement Format from the menu bar.

279
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.10.5 Setting Properties

Selecting Property from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the properties. The
following tab is available for setting the properties of the numeric label object.
1) Property tab

Caption - Don’t show

Select whether to show or hide the caption text.
Caption - Text [Cannot be edited.]
The text describing the data is displayed.
Caption - Color
Specify the color of the text.
When Data Using List Colors is selected for Display Format, this color setting will be invalid when
Label Object
Numeric

other sample data is selected.

Caption - Font
Specify the font to be used for the text. Be sure to also specify the language when specifying the font
in the Font dialog box.
Caption - Alignment
Specify Left, Center, or Right for the alignment of the text within the label.
Background - Transparent
Specify whether to fill in the background. When pseudo color is selected as the data to be displayed,
selecting fill the background fills the background of the label with the pseudo color.
Background - Color
Specify the background color of the label.
When Data Using List Colors is selected for Display Format, this color setting will be invalid when
other sample data is selected.
When pseudo color is selected as the data to be displayed, the background is filled with the pseudo
color. Even if the background color is changed here, the setting will return to the pseudo color.
Frame - None
Select whether to draw a frame around the label.

280
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

Frame - Color
Specify a color for the frame around the label.
Frame - Width
Specify the width of the frame around the label.
See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

Label Object
Numeric

281
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.11 String Label Object

The string (text) label object is used to show the name of the data to be displayed.

3.11.1 Setting Properties

Selecting Property from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the properties. The
following tab is available for setting the properties of the string label object.

1) Property tab

Caption - Text
Type the name of the data to be displayed.
Caption - Alignment
Specify Left, Center or Right for the alignment of the text within the label.
Caption - Color
Object
String

Specify the color of the text.

Label

Caption - Font
Specify the font to be used for the text. Be sure to also specify the language when specifying the font
in the Font dialog box.
Background - Transparent
Specify whether to fill in the background.
Background - Color
Specify the background color of the label.
Frame - None
Select whether to draw a frame around the label.
Frame - Color
Specify a color for the frame around the label.
Frame - Width
Specify the width of the frame around the label.
See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

282
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.12 Pseudo Color Object

The pseudo color object is used to show a pseudo color. A pseudo color is the visualized colorimetric
value of a sample or target data.

3.12.1 Right-click Menu

Right-clicking a pseudo color object opens a context menu showing the available menu items. Table
below shows the menu items displayed for the pseudo color object.

Right-click menu of Pseudo color object

Menu Item Function

Group Shows a dialog box for specifying the attributes of the data to be plotted.
Item Shows a dialog box for specifying the data to be displayed.
Illuminant Shows the Illuminant settings dialog box.
Property Shows the property dialog box.
See page 301 for the group attribute setting procedure.

Pseudo
Object
Color

283
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.12.2 Setting Items

Selecting Items from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the type of the data to be
displayed.

1) Content Settings tab

Data Type
Select whether to display the target data or sample data.
Always use master target
Select whether to always show or hide the master target when the target is displayed.
Pseudo

Object
Color

284
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.12.3 Setting Properties

Selecting Property from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the properties. This
dialog box has a single tab as shown below.

Background Color - Color1

Specify the background color shown on the left of or above the object.
Background Color - Color2
Specify the background color shown on the right of or below the object.
Position of Background
Select either of Horizontal or Vertical.
When Horizontal is selected, the colors specified with Color1 and Color2 are displayed on the right
and left of the object. When Vertical is selected, the colors specified with Color1 and Color2 are dis-
played above and below the object.
Caption - Show Caption
Select whether to display a caption.
Caption - Font
Specify the font used for the text.
When selecting a font name in the Font dialog box, be sure to also select a font type. Pseudo
Object
Color

Japanese characters may not display properly if the selected type is not a Japanese font.
Margin
Specify the top, bottom, right, and left margin widths of the pseudo color display.

285
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.13 Line Graph Object

3.13.1 Overview
The line graph object is used to judge data between different attributes. The group attributes are plotted
on the horizontal axis, and the colorimetric data is plotted on the vertical axis.
When the CM-512m3A is connected as an instrument, data for 25º, 45º, and 75º are displayed with a line.

3.13.2 Features
• Shows data with two or more attributes
• Shows the tolerance of each attribute

3.13.3 Right-click Menu

Right-clicking a graphic object opens a context menu showing the available menu items.
Table below shows the menu items displayed for the line graph object.

Tolerance area
Line Graph
Object

Right-click menu of line graph object

Menu Item Function

Show/Hide Grid Shows or hides the grid.
Show/Hide Tolerance Shows or hides the tolerances
Copy Copies the graphic object to the clipboard
Item Shows a dialog box for specifying a data item to be judged.
Property Shows the property dialog box

286
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.13.4 Setting Items

When Item is selected from the right-click menu, a dialog box appears for specifying the type of data to
be displayed.

Item
Select colorimetric data to be judged.
Available item: The colorimetric data selected in the list items

3.13.5 Setting Properties

Selecting Property from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the properties of the
graph.
The following five tabs are available for setting the properties of the line graph object.
1) Display
2) Judgement data axis (Example: ΔL*)
3) Column Axis
4) Title
5) Miscellaneous
The following sections describe the details of these tabs.
Line Graph
Object

287
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

1) Display tab

Show gridline
Select whether to show or hide gridlines.
Show Tolerances
Select whether to show or hide the tolerances.
Show all data
Select whether to show or hide all the data.
Show Data Number
Select whether to show or hide the data number shown on the list.
Font Specify the font of the number.
Color Specify the color of the number.
Target - Color
Specify the display color of the target data.
Target - Outline
Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
Line Graph
Object

outline cannot be specified.

Target - Marker
Specify -●-, -■-, X or - as the line type to indicate the target data.
Target - Size
Specify the size of the plot points.
Sample - Selected - Color
Specify the display color of the sample data being selected in the list window.
Sample - Selected - Outline
Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
outline cannot be specified.

288
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

Sample - Selected - Circle Frame

Draw a circle around the plot points of the selected data.
Sample - Non-Selected - Color
Specify the display color of the sample data that is not being selected in the list window.
Sample - Non-Selected - Outline
Specify the color of the outline of the plot points. When this option is not checked, the color of the
outline cannot be specified.
Sample - Marker
Specify -●-, -■-, X or - as the line type to indicate the sample data.
Sample - Size
Specify the size (0 to 5) of the plot points.
Sample - Target Width
Specify the line width (1 to 5) of the target data.
Sample - Sample
Specify the line width (1 to 5) of the sample data.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

Line Graph
Object

289
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

2) Judgement data axis (Example: ΔL*) tab

Specify the properties of the colorimetric data axis selected with Item.
The selected colorimetric data is shown as the name of the tab.

Scale - Auto [Minimum, Maximum, Major unit, Minor unit]

Specify whether to use the automatic setting of the scale for the colorimetric data axis (vertical axis)
selected in the Display Contents tab in the Item properties. When Auto is selected, these items are
automatically determined according to the minimum and maximum values of the data.
Scale - Value [Minimum, Maximum, Major unit, Minor unit]
Specify the minimum value, maximum value, major unit and minor unit of the scale for the colori-
metric data axis selected in the Display Contents tab in the Item properties.
Scale - Number of Decimals
Specify the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Scale - Color
Specify the scale color of the judgement data axis.
Title - Show Title
Select whether to show or hide the title of the axis of the colorimetric data selected in the Display
Contents tab in the Item properties.
Line Graph

Title - Text
Object

Specify the label name of the axis of the colorimetric data selected in the Display Contents tab in the
Item properties.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the label appearing on the colorimetric data axis selected in the Dis-
play Contents tab in the Item properties. Be sure to also specify the language when specifying the
font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the label color of the colorimetric data axis selected in the Display Contents tab in the Item
properties.
See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

290
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3) Column Axis (attribute) tab

Label - Font
Specify the font to be used for the label text. Be sure to also specify the language when specifying
the font in the Font dialog box.
Label - Color
Specify the label color.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

Line Graph
Object

291
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

4) Title tab

Show title
Select whether to show or hide the title of the graph.
Title - Text
Specify the text for the graph title.
Title - Font
Specify the font to be used for the graph title. Be sure to also specify the language when specifying
the font in the Font dialog box.
Title - Color
Specify the color of the graph title.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

Line Graph
Object

292
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

5) Miscellaneous tab

Colors - Background
Specify the background color of the graphic object.
Transparent When this option is checked, the background is transparent.
Colors - Plot area
Specify the color to be used for the inside of the graph.
Transparent When this option is checked, the inside of the graph is transparent.
Colors - Border of plot area
Specify the border color of the graph.
Colors - Gridline
Specify the gridline color of the graph.
Color - Tolerance Zone
Specify the color of the tolerance area.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

Line Graph
Object

293
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.14 Statistic Object

The statistic object is used to view the average, the standard deviation, the maximum and minimum, and
range values of specified colorimetric data.
The standard deviation is calculated based on unbiased variance.

3.14.1 Right-click Menu

Right-clicking a graphic object opens a context menu showing the available menu items.
Table below shows the menu items displayed for the statistic object.

Right-click menu of statistic object

Menu Item Function

Copy Copies the graphic object to the clipboard
Group Shows a dialog box for specifying the attributes of the data
Item Shows a dialog box for specifying data items to be judged
Property Shows the property dialog box
Statistic
Object

294
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.14.2 Setting Items

When Item is selected from the right-click menu, a dialog box appears for specifying colorimetric data
to be judged with a statistical object.

Item
Select colorimetric data to be judged.
Available item: The colorimetric data selected in the list items

Statistic
Object

295
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.14.3 Setting Properties

Selecting Property from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the properties.
The following tab is available for setting the properties of the statistic object.

1) Statistic tab

Text - Font
Specify the font of the character string to be displayed.
Text - Color
Specify the color of the character string.
Background - Color
Specify the background color of the graphic object.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

Statistic
Object

296
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.15 Line Object

The line object is used to draw lines.

3.15.1 Setting Properties

Selecting Property from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the properties. The
following tab is available for setting the properties of the line object.

1) Property tab

Width
Specify the width of the line.
Style
Select Solid Line, Dashed Line or Dotted Line as the line style.
Color
Specify the color of the line.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

Object
Line

297
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.16 Rectangle Object

The rectangle object is used to draw rectangles.

3.16.1 Setting Properties

Selecting Property from the right-click menu displays a dialog box for specifying the properties. The
following tab is available for setting the properties of the rectangle object.

1) Property tab

Line - Width
Specify the width of the frame.
Line - Color
Specify the color of the frame.
Background - Transparent
Specify whether to fill in the background.
Background - Color
Specify the background color.

See page 155 for the color setting procedure.

Rectangle
Object

298
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.17 Operation of the Canvas Window

in Edit Mode
3.17.1 Right-click Menu
Table below lists the right-click menu displayed for each graphic object to edit screens (to place graphic
objects) in the canvas window.

Right-click menu used for editing graphic objects

Menu Item Function

Cut* Cuts the graphic object.
Copy* Copies the graphic object.
Paste* Pastes the graphic object.
Bring Forward* Brings the graphic object forward.
Send Backward* Sends the graphic object backward.
Bring to Front* Brings the graphic object to the front.
Send to Back* Sends the graphic object to the back.
Illuminant Shows a dialog box for specifying the illuminant.
Group Shows a dialog box for specifying the group.
Plot Type Shows the plot type dialog box.
(Only for the absolute graph or color difference graph).
Property Shows the property dialog box.
The menu items marked with an asterisk can be selected from Edit in the menu bar.
Operation of
the Canvas
Window in
Edit Mode

299
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.17.2 Illuminant Setting

You can change the illuminant for the absolute graph (L*a*b*, HunterLab) object, color difference
graph (ΔL*Δa*Δb*, ΔLΔaΔb) object, 3D graph (ΔL*Δa*Δb*) object and pseudo color object. You can
also display data by using several illuminants for the absolute graph (L*a*b*, HunterLab) object, color
difference (ΔL*Δa*Δb*, ΔLΔaΔb) object and 3D graph (ΔL*Δa*Δb*) object.

Illuminant Mode - Single Illuminant

Select Primary, Secondary or Tertiary as the illuminant.
Illuminant Mode - Multiple Illuminants
Specify an illuminant to be used other than the primary illuminant.
Operation of
the Canvas
Window in
Edit Mode

300
 CHAPTER 3 : GRAPHIC OBJECT PROPERTIES

3.17.3 Group Setting

If the number of banks is set to 2 or more, the group attribute of the displayed data must be specified.
Select either SCI or SCE for the spectral graph, absolute graph, color difference graph, 3D graph, two-
axis graph, trend chart or numeric label objects. Select a group trait to draw data of any of 25 degree,
45 degree or 75 degree.

Operation of
the Canvas
Window in
Edit Mode

301
INDEX
Numerics Copying the list data ....................................113
Creating a New Data File .............................144
3D graph object .....................................18, 248 Cube .............................................................252
Customize dialog box ....................................15
A Customizing the standard toolbar ..................13
Absolute graph object ............................18, 224 Cutting out a Graphic Object .......................123
Add/Remove Item ......................................... 66 Cutting the list data ......................................113
Adding a new view ...................................... 123
Adjust ............................................................ 89 D
Aligning Graphic Objects ............................ 123 Data exchange with the instrument ..................9
All Data - Sample(s) .................................... 110 Data Information ..................................... 66, 70
All Data - Target(s) ..................................... 109 Data list ............................................................8
Assessment Tab ............................................. 59 Data List Object ...........................................264
Audit Trail .................................. 139, 141, 142 Data management ............................................9
Auto Fitting ................................................... 89 Data Name .....................................................70
Auto Save On .............................................. 157 Data Property ...............................................105
Auto Target ................................................... 82 Decimal Places ...............................................62
Automatic averaging measurement ............... 63 Default Template .........................................135
Auto-naming .................................................. 64 Defining a macro .........................................192
Averaged data .............................................. 116 Deleting a Graphic Object ...........................123
Deleting a view ............................................124
B Deleting the list data ....................................114
Bank setting ................................................... 57 Demo Mode .......................................... 22, 136
Blackbody locus .......................................... 242 Detail ............................................................133
Detailed ..........................................................28
C Directory structure .......................................134
Disconnect .....................................................33
Calibration .................................................9, 35 Disconnect the spectrophotometer ...................9
Calibration Interval Setting ........................... 64 Display .............................................................9
Calibration time ............................................. 36 Display View ........................................ 17, 153
Canvas window ......................10, 17, 120, 123 Displayed values ..............................................7
Cascade ........................................................ 150 Downloading calibration data ......................160
Changing the name/type of view ................. 124 Downloading Calibration Data to the
Changing the Size of a Graphic Object ....... 122 Instrument .................................................160
Classification by Target - Absolute data ..... 110 Downloading Configuration Data to the
Classification by Target - Target ** ............ 111 Instrument .................................................163
Color assessment ........................................... 52 Downloading the target data ................... 9, 178
Color difference equation ................................ 7 Downloading the Target Data to the
Color difference graph object ................18, 232 Instrument .................................................178
Color setting ................................................ 155 Downloading User Index to the Instrument .176
Color space ...................................................... 7
Connect .......................................................... 29 E
Connect the spectrophotometer to a PC .......... 9
Connection with instrument at startup ........ 136 Edit Mode ....................................................153
Constant Chroma Locus .....232, 234, 248, 250 Editing the list data ......................................113
Constant Hue Locus ...........232, 234, 248, 250 Eliminate outliers .................................. 75, 101
Copying a Graphic Object ........................... 123 Ellipse ................................................. 232, 248
Copying Target from the Existing Data ..68, 82 Ellipsoid .......................................................252

302
E-mail .......................................................... 159 L
Enlarging the list size .................................. 119
Executing a macro ....................................... 195 Line Graph Object ................................ 18, 286
Exit the SpectraMagic NX software ................ 9 Line object ............................................ 18, 297
External I/O ..................................................... 8 Linked target data ........................................111
Linking an Image to Data ............................107
F List ...............................................................109
List - Classification by Target .....................153
File created with ChromaMagic .................. 146 List - Color Setting ......................................153
File in SpectraMagic Ver.3.3 format List data
(.mdb) ....................................................... 146 Copy ......................................................113
File in SpectraMagic Ver.3.6 format Cut ........................................................113
(.wsv) ....................................................... 145 Delete ....................................................114
File Path ....................................................... 157 Edit ........................................................113
Footer ..................................................128, 131 Paste ......................................................113
Format of colorimetric data ......................... 148 Saving the list data in text format .........114
Format of spectral reflectance data ............. 147 Select ....................................................113
Former version ......................................58, 134 Simultaneous copy-and-paste ...............114
Sort ........................................................114
G List Expansionary Setting ............................158
Ganz&Griesser4 ......................................43, 44 List Format .............................................. 59, 91
Ganz&Griesser5 ......................................43, 44 List Items
Graph ............................................................... 8 Attributes ................................................47
Graphic object ............................................. 121 D65 .........................................................49
Group attribute ....................................286, 301 Index .......................................................50
Group Setting .............................................. 301 Instrument ...............................................48
Group Traits .................................................. 47 Setting the List items ..............................46
Special ....................................................51
H Spectral value .........................................47
List window ....................................10, 17, 108
Header .................................................128, 131 Load Template .............................................134
Help ................................................................. 8 Locking Files ...............................................137
Histogram .................................................... 265
M
I
Macro ...........................................................192
Illegal Access .............................................. 142 Manual data input ..................................... 9, 68
Illuminant ..................................................8, 37 Marker ..........................................................277
Illuminant 1 ................................................... 48 Master Target
Illuminant 2 ................................................... 48 .................. 86, 234, 250, 252, 276, 279, 284
Illuminant setting ......................................... 300 Measure target data ..........................................9
Image display .................................................. 8 Measurement ............................................. 9, 93
Image object ..........................................18, 275 Measurement Options ....................................63
Index ................................................................ 7 Menu bar ................................................. 10, 11
Initial Tolerance ............................................ 87 mes .......................................................... 8, 132
Input Colorimetric Target .............................. 78 met ...............................................................133
Input Spectral Target ..................................... 76 Moving a Graphic Object ............................122
Instrument control functions ........................... 8 MRU ............................................................195
Instrument Settings ........................................ 34 mtp ...............................................................133
Interval measurement ..............................93, 96
ISO Brightness .............................................. 42 N
Navigation window ........................................23
Next ..............................................................151

303
Numeric label object .............................18, 278 Screen Mode ................................................153
Secondary .....................................................300
O Security Functions .......................................138
Select target data from list items ......................9
Observer ............................................. 7, 37, 48
Selecting a Graphic Object ..........................121
Open Template at Startup ............................ 135
Selecting the list data ...................................113
Opening a Data File ..................................... 145
Selection tool .................................................18
Operation Limit ........................................... 140
Sensor Sync Window ............................ 19, 185
Operation of the Canvas Window in
Serial Port Settings ................................. 29, 31
Edit Mode ................................................ 299
Serial Printing ..............................................130
Operation window ......................................... 10
Shortcut keys ..................................................16
Simple ................................................... 28, 133
P
Simultaneous copy-and-paste of the
Page Setup ...........................................127, 128 list data .....................................................114
Pass/fail judgement ......................................... 9 Sorting the list data ......................................114
Password ...................................................... 143 Sound Setting ...............................................156
Pasting a Graphic Object ............................. 123 Specifying a User Calibration Value to the
Pasting the list data ...................................... 113 Instrument .................................................171
Position marker ........................................... 107 Specifying the Target Data ....................... 9, 82
Previous ....................................................... 151 Spectral data ...................................................76
Primary ........................................................ 300 Spectral graph object ............................ 18, 215
Primary, Secondary, Tertiary ........................ 38 Splash screen ..................................................27
Print ................................................................. 9 Standalone Configuration ............................163
Print Preview ............................................... 129 Standard ................................................ 28, 133
Printing ................................................127, 129 Standard toolbar ...................................... 10, 13
Printing View ........................................17, 153 Start the SpectraMagic NX software ...............9
Private database ........................................... 138 Starting Navigation ......................................151
Pseudo Color object ..............................18, 283 Startup Options ............................................135
Statistic Object ...................................... 18, 294
R Statistical value ................................... 110, 111
Status Bar ................................................ 10, 22
Rectangle object ....................................18, 298
Status window ...................................10, 21, 22
Reducing the list size ................................... 119
String label object ................................. 18, 282
Registering Target by Manual Data Input ..... 76
Supplementary Data Information ............ 65, 70
Registering target data by performing a
measurement .............................................. 68
T
Remote Measurement Option ...................... 196
Restoring the list size .................................. 119 Target ...................................................... 68, 71
Restriction ................................................... 139 Target automatic averaging
measurement ........................................ 68, 72
S Target data ................................................ 8, 68
Target Linkage Setting .................................115
Sample automatic averaging
Target manual averaging measurement .. 68, 73
measurement ........................................93, 98
Target Measurement ......................................69
Sample Data to upload ................................ 104
Target remote measurement .................... 68, 70
Sample manual averaging measurement .93, 99
Template File ...................................... 133, 134
Sample Measurement .................................... 94
Template Window ..........................................20
Sample remote measurement ..................93, 95
Tertiary .........................................................300
Sample Viewer ............................................. 67
Text data file ................................................147
Save .........................................................9, 132
Tile ...............................................................150
Save as Template ......................................... 133
Tint ............................................. 41, 42, 43, 44
Saving a Data File ....................................... 132
Tolerance for Each Target .............................88
Saving the list data in text format ................ 114
Tolerance Setting ...................................... 9, 87
Saving the list data in XML format ............. 114
304
Tolerances of color differences
(cube, ellipsoid) ....................................... 248
Tool icon bar ...........................................10, 18
Tree .............................................................. 108
Tree - Color Setting ..................................... 152
Trend chart/histogram object ................18, 265
Two-axis graph object ...........................18, 257

U
Upload data from the instrument ..................... 9
Upload sample data ......................................... 9
Uploading target data from the
instrument ............................................68, 80
Uploading the sample data from the
instrument ................................................ 102
User Database .............................................. 139
User equation ................................................. 53
User management ........................................ 138
UV Adjustment ............................................. 39

V
Version information ...................................... 27
View settings ............................................... 152
Visual Judgement ..................................92, 106

W
Welcome to SpectraMagic NX ..................... 28
White calibration .......................................9, 36
WI ...............................................40, 42, 43, 44
Window Operation when the List Window is
Hidden ...................................................... 126
Working Target .....................................85, 252

X
xy chromaticity diagram .............................. 240
xy chromaticity object ................................... 18

Z
Zero calibration .........................................9, 35

305
En 9222-1895-98 ©2011 KONICA MINOLTA, INC. CCLMDX